<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en-GB">
	<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Jspicer</id>
	<title>SkySuite Wiki - User contributions [en-gb]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Jspicer"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Jspicer"/>
	<updated>2026-05-06T15:12:17Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.33.0</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose&amp;diff=3243</id>
		<title>RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose&amp;diff=3243"/>
		<updated>2024-03-27T17:15:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Airline (Inflight Catering) Industry=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are unsure which Job Role option to choose, here is some helpful advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are employed by a service-oriented company or work within an airline subsidiary operation, involved in activities such as:&lt;br /&gt;
** catering&lt;br /&gt;
** airport services including ground handling, cleaning, maintenance etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** equipment refurbishment&lt;br /&gt;
** ticketing operations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Consumer (End Customer)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are employed by an airline or a group of airlines and have a head office function, then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Client Head Office Staff&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are involved in warehousing operations or you provide transportation/freight forwarding services then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Provider of Logistics (3PL) services&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a  company that supplies equipment, food &amp;amp; beverages or other products consumed during flights, then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Supplier/Vendor&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Lastly, if you are an employee of Kuehne+Nagel (or a proxy thereof), working in a role related to SkySuite, rather than a 3PL-related role, please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Control Tower Staff (e.g. non-3PL KN staff))&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.  NOTE: This may also include operational staff working for Gate Gourmet,  formerly LSG SkyChefs Europe, who are not directly working in a catering facility. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Automotive Supply Chain Industry=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are unsure which Job Role option to choose, here is some helpful advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a manufacturer who is supplying parts that will be used in the assembly of a vehicle, please choose the option: '''Supplier/Vendor'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If work for the company who market the vehicle being produced, please choose the option: '''Client Head Office Staff'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a company who provide 3PL (warehousing, transport and logistics) services then please choose the option: '''Provider of (3PL) Logistics Services'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for the organization that is responsible for the plant in which vehicles are assembled, please select: '''Consumer (End Customer)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you an employee of Kuehne+Nagel (or a proxy thereof), including those KN staff who are based at a consolidation center, then please select: '''Control Tower Staff (e.g. non-3PL KN staff)'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_ContainerLoadPlan&amp;diff=3176</id>
		<title>Requisition ContainerLoadPlan</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_ContainerLoadPlan&amp;diff=3176"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T15:12:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Dependent upon configuration, we are able to produce a container loading plan for a requisition; currently this is only available when the requisition has been automatically generated by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the system to produce an automatically generated requisition with a container loading plan, all of the following conditions need to be met:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) There is client-specific configuration held for the customer that specifies that we can/will produce container loading plans for them.Ṫ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) There are one or more active stations for the customer where the station is configured to automatically generate requisitions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) There is configuration held for the customer that specifies that we will create automatically generated requisitions (with a container loading plan) as per an agreed scheduleṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE''': The schedule is typically ''daily''; the system will assess the current demand and inventory levels at a set time each day and may produce one or more requisitions at the set (reoccurring) time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) For the active station(s) which are configured for automatic requisition generation, there is at least one active par level which is configured with the Automatic Requisition Option: '''ContainerFill'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this one option of four, the options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: '''Manual	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will not be included in any automatically generated requisitions - must be ordered manually (although this includes using Requisition Templates).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2: '''Scheduled	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will included in automatically generated requisitions - its expected to be ordered on a regular and consistent ordering cycle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3: '''Events	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will included in automatically generated requisitions that are triggered from events - such as approval of an inventory count or ad hoc requests made via the portal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4: '''ContainerFill	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will be included in an automatically generated Requisition to fill a container if there is forecast demand&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be clear, '''only''' materials which are configured with the last option will be considered for inclusion in the system-generated requisition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) The item must be ''orderable'' - in other words, the status of the material must be either &amp;quot;Current&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Phase Out&amp;quot; and the status of the par level must be either ''Active'' or Phased Out (with no final supply date OR a final supply date that's in the future). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6) There is inventory available at the supplying warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7) There is demand for the materialṪṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8) Materials must have weight and volume attributes defined (without this information, the system will have no idea the qty of the product that can be accommodated within a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the system does produce a container-filled requisition, it will be created in status: ''Awaiting Approval'' (the normal status for automatically generated requisitions is: ''Awaiting Station Review'').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the scenario that there is sufficient demand and sufficient inventory at the warehouse that will not fit in a single container, the system will produce multiple requisitions.  There is a 1:1 ratio between a system-generated, container-filled requisition and a [sea] container; in other words, such a system-generated requisition will never specify a loading list of materials that exceeds the maximum loading a [sea] container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a container loading plan is available for a requisition, you will see a button beneath the requisition-lines data grid on the Edit Requisition page titled: '''Container Load Plan''', if you click on this button, you will see a new window which will show a static graphic showing an illustrative container loading plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_Static_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beneath the image is a data grid which details the materials that have been included in the container loading plan; you will likely need to scroll down to see the list of materials; each material will have a color assigned to it that will relate to the image above the data grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''TIP:''' you can toggle the image on/off by clicking on the eye icon that is shown above the container loading plan image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_WithoutGraphic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the window, the top section shows the type of container being loaded, the maximum volume of it and its maximum weight; it also shows the utilizaton from the loading (note: it will be rare that the utilization is 100%).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beneath this panel, you will see the eye icon that I mentioned above, that you can use to show/hide the container loading plan image.  By default, the page will load with the image in static mode; as you wish, you can switch to interactive mode - this will allow you to zoom in, zoom out and rotate/spin the loading plan so you can view it from any direction/angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_Interactive.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When in interactive mode, you will see a circle in the center of the graphic that is split in 4x quarters, there will be two black quarters and two white quarters in opposing positions.  Additionally, when in interactive mode, the Export to PDF button on the toolbar above the graphic is automatically hidden; the button will only be presented to you when in static mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_PDFOutput.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''IMPORTANT NOTE:''' If any changes are made to a definition of the requisition, the loading plan is invalidated - you will be warned if this will happen.  Such changes would include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing a line from the requisition&lt;br /&gt;
* Adding an extra line to the requisition&lt;br /&gt;
* Increasing or decreasing the order qty on an existing requisition line&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_WarningUserIfReqDefChanges.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loading plan that the system generates will be dependent upon many factors, including:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* inventory held&lt;br /&gt;
* current demand&lt;br /&gt;
* configuration for the number of days to look-ahead for demandṪṪṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
* weights and volumes of the materials where there is both demand and inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* stacking configuration (the system will only permit a maximum of one pallet to be stacked on top of another); not all materials can support other products to be stacked on top of them and for the products which do permit pallets to be stacked on-top, there is a maximum weight that can be stacked on top, which is typically &amp;lt;= the weight of a full container of the product that is on floor of the container&lt;br /&gt;
* grouping of materials - not all materials can be loaded in the same container - thus certain materials can only be loaded with a finite list of other eligible materials; this is achieved via Loading Groups, which is defined on a per material basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you a planner (station provisioning manager) and you are happy with the requisition that has been generated by the system, you can approve it in the usual way.  As mentioned above, a PDF can be produced by the system which can be shared with the warehouse team to pick and load the [sea] container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ṫ for IT support team only, this means that that there is config for Cargo planning in the OrganizationAttributes table for the specific client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪ for IT support team only, this means an entry in the ScheduleTaskConfig&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪṪ for IT Support team only, this means that there must records in the NWADetail table, where there is a +ve OutQty and the parent NWAHeader record is in status: ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪṪṪ for IT Support team only, this relates to the optional OrganizationAttributes configuration flag, Group Name: CARGOPLANNER_SERVICE, Attribute Name: AUTOGEN_MAX_EARLYSHIP_DAYS&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_ContainerLoadPlan&amp;diff=3175</id>
		<title>Requisition ContainerLoadPlan</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_ContainerLoadPlan&amp;diff=3175"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T15:11:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Dependent upon configuration, we are able to produce a container loading plan for a requisition; currently this is only available when the requisition has been automatically generated by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the system to produce an automatically generated requisition with a container loading plan, all of the following conditions need to be met:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) There is client-specific configuration held for the customer that specifies that we can/will produce container loading plans for them.Ṫ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) There are one or more active stations for the customer where the station is configured to automatically generate requisitions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) There is configuration held for the customer that specifies that we will create automatically generated requisitions (with a container loading plan) as per an agreed scheduleṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE''': The schedule is typically ''daily''; the system will assess the current demand and inventory levels at a set time each day and may produce one or more requisitions at the set (reoccurring) time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) For the active station(s) which are configured for automatic requisition generation, there is at least one active par level which is configured with the Automatic Requisition Option: '''ContainerFill'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this one option of four, the options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: '''Manual	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will not be included in any automatically generated requisitions - must be ordered manually (although this includes using Requisition Templates).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2: '''Scheduled	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will included in automatically generated requisitions - its expected to be ordered on a regular and consistent ordering cycle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3: '''Events	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will included in automatically generated requisitions that are triggered from events - such as approval of an inventory count or ad hoc requests made via the portal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4: '''ContainerFill	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will be included in an automatically generated Requisition to fill a container if there is forecast demand&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be clear, '''only''' materials which are configured with the last option will be considered for inclusion in the system-generated requisition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) The item must be ''orderable'' - in other words, the status of the material must be either &amp;quot;Current&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Phase Out&amp;quot; and the status of the par level must be either ''Active'' or Phased Out (with no final supply date OR a final supply date that's in the future). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6) There is inventory available at the supplying warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7) There is demand for the materialṪṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8) Materials must have weight and volume attributes defined (without this information, the system will have no idea the qty of the product that can be accommodated within a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the system does produce a container-filled requisition, it will be created in status: ''Awaiting Approval'' (the normal status for automatically generated requisitions is: ''Awaiting Station Review'').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the scenario that there is sufficient demand and sufficient inventory at the warehouse that will not fit in a single container, the system will produce multiple requisitions.  There is a 1:1 ratio between a system-generated, container-filled requisition and a [sea] container; in other words, such a system-generated requisition will never specify a loading list of materials that exceeds the maximum loading a [sea] container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a container loading plan is available for a requisition, you will see a button beneath the requisition-lines data grid on the Edit Requisition page titled: '''Container Load Plan''', if you click on this button, you will see a new window which will show a static graphic showing an illustrative container loading plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_Static_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beneath the image is a data grid which details the materials that have been included in the container loading plan; you will likely need to scroll down to see the list of materials; each material will have a color assigned to it that will relate to the image above the data grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''TIP:''' you can toggle the image on/off by clicking on the eye icon that is shown above the container loading plan image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_WithoutGraphic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the window, the top section shows the type of container being loaded, the maximum volume of it and its maximum weight; it also shows the utilizaton from the loading (note: it will be rare that the utilization is 100%).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beneath this panel, you will see the eye icon that I mentioned above, that you can use to show/hide the container loading plan image.  By default, the page will load with the image in static mode; as you wish, you can switch to interactive mode - this will allow you to zoom in, zoom out and rotate/spin the loading plan so you can view it from any direction/angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_Interactive.JPG]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When in interactive mode, you will see a circle in the center of the graphic that is split in 4x quarters, there will be two black quarters and two white quarters in opposing positions.  Additionally, when in interactive mode, the Export to PDF button on the toolbar above the graphic is automatically hidden; the button will only be presented to you when in static mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_PDFOutput.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''IMPORTANT NOTE:''' If any changes are made to a definition of the requisition, the loading plan is invalidated - you will be warned if this will happen.  Such changes would include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing a line from the requisition&lt;br /&gt;
* Adding an extra line to the requisition&lt;br /&gt;
* Increasing or decreasing the order qty on an existing requisition line&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_WarningUserIfReqDefChanges.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loading plan that the system generates will be dependent upon many factors, including:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* inventory held&lt;br /&gt;
* current demand&lt;br /&gt;
* configuration for the number of days to look-ahead for demandṪṪṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
* weights and volumes of the materials where there is both demand and inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* stacking configuration (the system will only permit a maximum of one pallet to be stacked on top of another); not all materials can support other products to be stacked on top of them and for the products which do permit pallets to be stacked on-top, there is a maximum weight that can be stacked on top, which is typically &amp;lt;= the weight of a full container of the product that is on floor of the container&lt;br /&gt;
* grouping of materials - not all materials can be loaded in the same container - thus certain materials can only be loaded with a finite list of other eligible materials; this is achieved via Loading Groups, which is defined on a per material basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you a planner (station provisioning manager) and you are happy with the requisition that has been generated by the system, you can approve it in the usual way.  As mentioned above, a PDF can be produced by the system which can be shared with the warehouse team to pick and load the [sea] container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ṫ for IT support team only, this means that that there is config for Cargo planning in the OrganizationAttributes table for the specific client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪ for IT support team only, this means an entry in the ScheduleTaskConfig&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪṪ for IT Support team only, this means that there must records in the NWADetail table, where there is a +ve OutQty and the parent NWAHeader record is in status: ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪṪṪ for IT Support team only, this relates to the optional OrganizationAttributes configuration flag, Group Name: CARGOPLANNER_SERVICE, Attribute Name: AUTOGEN_MAX_EARLYSHIP_DAYS&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_ContainerLoadPlan&amp;diff=3174</id>
		<title>Requisition ContainerLoadPlan</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_ContainerLoadPlan&amp;diff=3174"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T15:10:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Dependent upon configuration, we are able to produce a container loading plan for a requisition; currently this is only available when the requisition has been automatically generated by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the system to produce an automatically generated requisition with a container loading plan, all of the following conditions need to be met:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) There is client-specific configuration held for the customer that specifies that we can/will produce container loading plans for them.Ṫ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) There are one or more active stations for the customer where the station is configured to automatically generate requisitions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) There is configuration held for the customer that specifies that we will create automatically generated requisitions (with a container loading plan) as per an agreed scheduleṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE''': The schedule is typically ''daily''; the system will assess the current demand and inventory levels at a set time each day and may produce one or more requisitions at the set (reoccurring) time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) For the active station(s) which are configured for automatic requisition generation, there is at least one active par level which is configured with the Automatic Requisition Option: '''ContainerFill'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this one option of four, the options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: '''Manual	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will not be included in any automatically generated requisitions - must be ordered manually (although this includes using Requisition Templates).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2: '''Scheduled	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will included in automatically generated requisitions - its expected to be ordered on a regular and consistent ordering cycle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3: '''Events	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will included in automatically generated requisitions that are triggered from events - such as approval of an inventory count or ad hoc requests made via the portal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4: '''ContainerFill	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will be included in an automatically generated Requisition to fill a container if there is forecast demand&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be clear, '''only''' materials which are configured with the last option will be considered for inclusion in the system-generated requisition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) The item must be ''orderable'' - in other words, the status of the material must be either &amp;quot;Current&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Phase Out&amp;quot; and the status of the par level must be either ''Active'' or Phased Out (with no final supply date OR a final supply date that's in the future). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6) There is inventory available at the supplying warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7) There is demand for the materialṪṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8) Materials must have weight and volume attributes defined (without this information, the system will have no idea the qty of the product that can be accommodated within a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the system does produce a container-filled requisition, it will be created in status: ''Awaiting Approval'' (the normal status for automatically generated requisitions is: ''Awaiting Station Review'').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the scenario that there is sufficient demand and sufficient inventory at the warehouse that will not fit in a single container, the system will produce multiple requisitions.  There is a 1:1 ratio between a system-generated, container-filled requisition and a [sea] container; in other words, such a system-generated requisition will never specify a loading list of materials that exceeds the maximum loading a [sea] container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a container loading plan is available for a requisition, you will see a button beneath the requisition-lines data grid on the Edit Requisition page titled: '''Container Load Plan''', if you click on this button, you will see a new window which will show a static graphic showing an illustrative container loading plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_Static_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beneath the image is a data grid which details the materials that have been included in the container loading plan; you will likely need to scroll down to see the list of materials; each material will have a color assigned to it that will relate to the image above the data grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''TIP:''' you can toggle the image on/off by clicking on the eye icon that is shown above the container loading plan image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_WithoutGraphic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the window, the top section shows the type of container being loaded, the maximum volume of it and its maximum weight; it also shows the utilizaton from the loading (note: it will be rare that the utilization is 100%).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beneath this panel, you will see the eye icon that I mentioned above, that you can use to show/hide the container loading plan image.  By default, the page will load with the image in static mode; as you wish, you can switch to interactive mode - this will allow you to zoom in, zoom out and rotate/spin the loading plan so you can view it from any direction/angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_Interactive.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When in interactive mode, you will see a circle in the center of the graphic that is split in 4x quarters, there will be two black quarters and two white quarters in opposing positions.  Additionally, when in interactive mode, the Export to PDF button on the toolbar above the graphic is automatically hidden; the button will only be presented to you when in static mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_PDFOutput.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''IMPORTANT NOTE:''' If any changes are made to a definition of the requisition, the loading plan is invalidated - you will be warned if this will happen.  Such changes would include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing a line from the requisition&lt;br /&gt;
* Adding an extra line to the requisition&lt;br /&gt;
* Increasing or decreasing the order qty on an existing requisition line&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_WarningUserIfReqDefChanges.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loading plan that the system generates will be dependent upon many factors, including:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* inventory held&lt;br /&gt;
* current demand&lt;br /&gt;
* configuration for the number of days to look-ahead for demandṪṪṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
* weights and volumes of the materials where there is both demand and inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* stacking configuration (the system will only permit a maximum of one pallet to be stacked on top of another); not all materials can support other products to be stacked on top of them and for the products which do permit pallets to be stacked on-top, there is a maximum weight that can be stacked on top, which is typically &amp;lt;= the weight of a full container of the product that is on floor of the container&lt;br /&gt;
* grouping of materials - not all materials can be loaded in the same container - thus certain materials can only be loaded with a finite list of other eligible materials; this is achieved via Loading Groups, which is defined on a per material basis.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you a planner (station provisioning manager) and you are happy with the requisition that has been generated by the system, you can approve it in the usual way.  As mentioned above, a PDF can be produced by the system which can be shared with the warehouse team to pick and load the [sea] container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ṫ for IT support team only, this means that that there is config for Cargo planning in the OrganizationAttributes table for the specific client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪ for IT support team only, this means an entry in the ScheduleTaskConfig&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪṪ for IT Support team only, this means that there must records in the NWADetail table, where there is a +ve OutQty and the parent NWAHeader record is in status: ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪṪṪ for IT Support team only, this relates to the optional OrganizationAttributes configuration flag, Group Name: CARGOPLANNER_SERVICE, Attribute Name: AUTOGEN_MAX_EARLYSHIP_DAYS&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_Static_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow.jpg&amp;diff=3173</id>
		<title>File:SLX Static ReqContainerLoadingPlan ModalWindow.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_Static_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow.jpg&amp;diff=3173"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T15:05:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_WithoutGraphic.jpg&amp;diff=3172</id>
		<title>File:SLX ReqContainerLoadingPlan ModalWindow WithoutGraphic.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_WithoutGraphic.jpg&amp;diff=3172"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T15:05:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_Interactive.JPG&amp;diff=3171</id>
		<title>File:SLX ReqContainerLoadingPlan ModalWindow Interactive.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_Interactive.JPG&amp;diff=3171"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T15:04:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_PDFOutput.jpg&amp;diff=3170</id>
		<title>File:SLX ReqContainerLoadingPlan PDFOutput.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_PDFOutput.jpg&amp;diff=3170"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T15:04:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_WarningUserIfReqDefChanges.jpg&amp;diff=3169</id>
		<title>File:SLX ReqContainerLoadingPlan WarningUserIfReqDefChanges.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_WarningUserIfReqDefChanges.jpg&amp;diff=3169"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T15:03:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_ContainerLoadPlan&amp;diff=3168</id>
		<title>Requisition ContainerLoadPlan</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_ContainerLoadPlan&amp;diff=3168"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T15:02:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: Created page with &amp;quot;Dependent upon configuration, we are able to produce a container loading plan for a requisition; currently this is only available when the requisition has been automatically g...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Dependent upon configuration, we are able to produce a container loading plan for a requisition; currently this is only available when the requisition has been automatically generated by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For the system to produce an automatically generated requisition with a container loading plan, all of the following conditions need to be met:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1) There is client-specific configuration held for the customer that specifies that we can/will produce container loading plans for them.Ṫ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2) There are one or more active stations for the customer where the station is configured to automatically generate requisitions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3) There is configuration held for the customer that specifies that we will create automatically generated requisitions (with a container loading plan) as per an agreed scheduleṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE''': The schedule is typically ''daily''; the system will assess the current demand and inventory levels at a set time each day and may produce one or more requisitions at the set (reoccurring) time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4) For the active station(s) which are configured for automatic requisition generation, there is at least one active par level which is configured with the Automatic Requisition Option: '''ContainerFill'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that this one option of four, the options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1: '''Manual	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will not be included in any automatically generated requisitions - must be ordered manually (although this includes using Requisition Templates).  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2: '''Scheduled	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will included in automatically generated requisitions - its expected to be ordered on a regular and consistent ordering cycle&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3: '''Events	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will included in automatically generated requisitions that are triggered from events - such as approval of an inventory count or ad hoc requests made via the portal&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4: '''ContainerFill	'''&lt;br /&gt;
Material will be included in an automatically generated Requisition to fill a container if there is forecast demand&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To be clear, '''only''' materials which are configured with the last option will be considered for inclusion in the system-generated requisition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5) The item must be ''orderable'' - in other words, the status of the material must be either &amp;quot;Current&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Phase Out&amp;quot; and the status of the par level must be either ''Active'' or Phased Out (with no final supply date OR a final supply date that's in the future). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6) There is inventory available at the supplying warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7) There is demand for the materialṪṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8) Materials must have weight and volume attributes defined (without this information, the system will have no idea the qty of the product that can be accommodated within a container).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the system does produce a container-filled requisition, it will be created in status: ''Awaiting Approval'' (the normal status for automatically generated requisitions is: ''Awaiting Station Review'').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the scenario that there is sufficient demand and sufficient inventory at the warehouse that will not fit in a single container, the system will produce multiple requisitions.  There is a 1:1 ratio between a system-generated, container-filled requisition and a [sea] container; in other words, such a system-generated requisition will never specify a loading list of materials that exceeds the maximum loading a [sea] container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a container loading plan is available for a requisition, you will see a button beneath the requisition-lines data grid on the Edit Requisition page titled: '''Container Load Plan''', if you click on this button, you will see a new window which will show a static graphic showing an illustrative container loading plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_Static_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beneath the image is a data grid which details the materials that have been included in the container loading plan; you will likely need to scroll down to see the list of materials; each material will have a colour assigned to it that will relate to the image above the data grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''TIP:''' you can toggle the image on/off by clicking on the eye icon that is shown above the container loading plan image.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_WithoutGraphic.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the window, the top section shows the type of container being loaded, the maximum volume of it and its maximum weight; it also shows the utilizaton from the loading (note: it will be rare that the utilization is 100%).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Beneath this panel, you will see the eye icon that I mentioned above, that you can use to show/hide the container loading plan image.  By default, the page will load with the image in static mode; as you wish, you can switch to interactive mode - this will allow you to zoom in, zoom out and rotate/spin the loading plan so you can view it from any direction/angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_ModalWindow_Interactive.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When in interactive mode, you will see a circle in the center of the graphic that is split in 4x quarters, there will be two black quarters and two white quarters in opposing positions.  Additionally, when in interactive mode, the Export to PDF button on the toolbar above the graphic is automatically hidden; the button will only be presented to you when in static mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_PDFOutput.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''IMPORTANT NOTE:''' If any changes are made to a definition of the requisition, the loading plan is invalidated - you will be warned if this will happen.  Such changes would include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Removing a line from the requisition&lt;br /&gt;
* Adding an extra line to the requisition&lt;br /&gt;
* Increasing or decreasing the order qty on an existing requisition line&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SLX_ReqContainerLoadingPlan_WarningUserIfReqDefChanges.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The loading plan that the system generates will be dependent upon many factors, including:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* inventory held&lt;br /&gt;
* current demand&lt;br /&gt;
* configuration for the number of days to look-ahead for demandṪṪṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
* weights and volumes of the materials where there is both demand and inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* stacking configuration (the system will only permit a maximum of one pallet to be stacked on top of another); not all materials can support other products to be stacked on top of them and for the products which do permit pallets to be stacked on-top, there is a maximum weight that can be stacked on top, which is typically &amp;lt;= the weight of a full container of the product that is on floor of the container&lt;br /&gt;
* grouping of materials - not all materials can be loaded in the same container - thus certain materials can only be loaded with a finite list of other eligible materials.ṪṪṪṪṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you a planner (station provisioning manager) and you are happy with the requisition that has been generated by the system, you can approve it in the usual way.  As mentioned above, a PDF can be produced by the system which can be shared with the warehouse team to pick and load the [sea] container.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ṫ for IT support team only, this means that that there is config for Cargo planning in the OrganizationAttributes table for the specific client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪ for IT support team only, this means an entry in the ScheduleTaskConfig&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪṪ for IT Support team only, this means that there must records in the NWADetail table, where there is a +ve OutQty and the parent NWAHeader record is in status: ''Active''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ṪṪṪṪ for IT Support team only, this relates to the optional OrganizationAttributes configuration flag, Group Name: CARGOPLANNER_SERVICE, Attribute Name: AUTOGEN_MAX_EARLYSHIP_DAYS&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_AwaitingApproval&amp;diff=3167</id>
		<title>Requisition AwaitingApproval</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_AwaitingApproval&amp;diff=3167"/>
		<updated>2023-10-23T12:51:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Approval of requisitions can vary depending on a number of factors, in brief:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the requisition is for a SAP-Centric customer, it is possible to edit a requisition AFTER it has been approved; this is not possible for customers who are not &amp;quot;SAP-Centric&amp;quot;.  For SAP-Centric customers, only requisitions which are in status: &amp;quot;Awaiting Approval&amp;quot; will be listed in the portal, whereas for requisitions which are SAPCentric, requisitions in the following statuses will be listed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
   *    Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
   *    Awaiting Confirmation&lt;br /&gt;
   *    Awaiting Schedule&lt;br /&gt;
   *    Partially Scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
   *    Fully Scheduled&lt;br /&gt;
   *    Partially Agreed&lt;br /&gt;
   *    Fully Agreed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;SAP-Centric&amp;quot; customer is where SkySuite interfaces only with SAP and all 3rd party WMS systems are interfaced via SAP, in other words there is no direct EDI link between any 3rd party WMS system and SkySuiteṪ&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non SAP-Centric airline is where SkySuite is communicating directly with one or more external warehouse management systems (WMS).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another factor is whether or not SkyLog will produce a container loading plan for a requisition; this is dependent upon configuration.  This configuration does not affect the UI at all on the index page; in other words the listing page (https://{instance}.skylogportal.com/Requisition/AwaitingApproval) will look the same regardless as to whether or not SkyLog can produce a container loading plan for a requisition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''SAP-Centric customers please click [[Requisition_Alter|here]].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Non SAP-Centric customers please click [[Requisition_Approve|here]].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Customers where SkyLog will produce a Container Loading Plan - please click [[Requisition_ContainerLoadPlan|here]].'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ṫ - this is actually a generalization as we do have some SAPCentric customers where there are one or more direct interfaces between a WMS and SkySuite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_Index&amp;diff=3103</id>
		<title>Requisition Index</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_Index&amp;diff=3103"/>
		<updated>2023-07-14T09:22:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Tips and tricks}}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating Manual Requisitions=&lt;br /&gt;
Typically, you will create a Requisition from scratch if you want to order 1 or a small number of items outside your regular ordering sequence due to some unforeseen circumstance. If you need to order a lot of items, you will find it quicker to create the Requisition from a pre-stored template but see the below [[#Creating a New Requisition from a Template|''''Creating a New Requisition from a Template'''']] for more details on this, and also this [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/?title=Requisition_ManageStationTemplates '''link''']] for maintaining the template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Requisition from scratch you should take the add icon from the Create/ Review Requisitions page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_1.PNG|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following page will be displayed;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_2.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the header section you enter the date you require the goods by and any comment you may like to record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the detail section, you add the items you want by pressing the add icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will then display a screen allowing you to select the item (You simply select an item by pressing the &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; button, if you don’t see the item you want you can page through until you find it or use the filters by clicking the three dots on each column) and then add the required quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_4.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a quantity that is not a multiple of the default pack size, you will get the following pop-up in which you will need to detail whether to round up or down accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_5.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After entering the header section and when you press the add button to select detail or you press the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button the system performs a check to see if the date you requested is possible if it is not you will see a message similar to the one below;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_6.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have added a line you will be returned to the page where you see the lines added so far and you can add another line by pressing Add Icon again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_7.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submitting your Requisitions==&lt;br /&gt;
You can continue to add lines until you have entered all the items you need. When you are ready to submit your Requisition to SkylogistiX press the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button. After this, you will no longer be able to add to this Requisition so only press Submit when you have entered everything. If you wish to save and come back to the Requisition later use &amp;quot;Save and Exit&amp;quot; to save your work in this case the status of the Requisition will stay &amp;quot;Pre-Manual Submit&amp;quot; and you can come back to it later. Once you press Submit the status will change to &amp;quot;Awaiting Approval&amp;quot; which means SkylogistiX will review it. You will receive an email advising you that the Requisition has been successfully submitted for review.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the main Create/Review Requisitions screen you will see that it is now at &amp;quot;Awaiting Approval&amp;quot; status – see below example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_8.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating a New Requisition from a Template=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create new Templates or maintain your existing Templates by pressing the 'Lightening Bolt' icon from the main &amp;quot;Create/ Review Requisitions&amp;quot; page;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_9.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you press &amp;quot;Manage Templates&amp;quot; you will see a list of any existing templates for your station;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_10.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above there is a template stored call &amp;quot;LAX Template&amp;quot;, to see the items in the template click the drop-down arrow;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_11.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wanted to create a Requisition from this Template press the &amp;quot;Create&amp;quot; button. This will automatically create a new Requisition with all the items that are defined on the Template. In the example below, you can see the Requisition with 6 items has been created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_12.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here you can edit the Quantities, add new lines or delete lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_13.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then once ready you can submit your Requisition like in the example [[#Submitting your Requisitions|'''here''']] which was referenced above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Reviewing an Automated Requisition=&lt;br /&gt;
Depending upon your station configuration, requisitions could be automatically generated by the system. The requisition will be available for your review on the “Create/ Review Requisitions” page. It is suggested to review the requisition within one workday from the requisition “Creation Date”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Take the “Edit” icon of the requisition with “Awaiting Station Review” status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 01.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be presented with the requisition details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 02.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Requisition Totals''' – Total calculated weight, volume, and number of pallets of the requisition quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Requisition No''' – The number of the requisition.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Required Date''' – This date is calculated by the system and reflects the date which the goods need to arrive at the station by (if there are multiple dates at the line-level, the header level date will be the latest/last of the line-level dates).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Comment''' (Optional) – Enter a Comment.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Client Order Note''' (Optional) – Enter a Client Order Note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add items not listed in the requisition with the “Add” icon. Refer to the “Add Item” screen explanation in the [[#Creating Manual Requisitions|''''Creating Manual Requisitions'''']] section 1 above:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated_Req_03.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check the “Requested Qty” of each item fulfills your station inventory requirements from the “Required Date” till the Next Planned Arrival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When “Suggested Qty” is negative, there is too much stock in the station. Then, depending on your station configuration, “Requested Qty” could be automatically set to zero or your station could be required to return stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the detail section, you can review the item data by pressing the expand arrow at the item level (this appears on the far left hand side of the data grid):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req Arrow 04.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will then display a screen with the “Requisition Detail”, “Item Parameters”, and “Explain Forecast” tabs, containing the explanation and the base data used to calculate the Suggested Quantity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 05.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The calculated inventory requirement is based on the most recent approved count for the station &amp;amp; material (dates may differ depending upon station count category confoiguratins and other factors, the “In-Transit Quantity” consider en route to your station, the “Days Between Delivery/Orders”, and the forecast set up. If you edit the “Requested Qty” to a different number, a “Comment” may need to be provided as explanation as to why you wish to send a different quantity than has been forecasted (again, a comment may or may not be required depending on configuration):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 06.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom of the page click on the “Accept” button to confirm the order, meaning that you havce reviewed for all lines on the requisition and you agree with or you have adjusted the requested quantities accordingly for each material on the order. Once submitted, the requisition will be reviewed by your Station Provisioning Manager, who will approve the orders (warehouse-shipments and possible direct purchase orders) to your station.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE:''' Your station provisioning manager has the ability to adjust the quantities prior to approving the requisition, so the quantity you request may not be the final quantity that is shipped.  Furthermore, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 07.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Tracking a Requisition Status=&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have submitted a requisition, as described in the section above, the next step is a review by an authorised planner, often a SkylogistiX employee in the material planning operations team. As previously described, until that review takes place the requisition will be at ''Awaiting Approval'' status. Once it has been reviewed by the authorised planner, the status will move to either ''Rejected'' or ''Outstanding'' and you will receive an email telling you that the requisition has now been approved or rejected. If approved, it is possible that not all the items and quantities you requested have been approved and therefore some of the quantities you requested may have been altered. If you want to check which materials havce been approved and the final approved-quantities, please follow the steps described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The requisition will not stay at the ''Outstanding'' status very long because as soon as it reaches ''Outstanding'' status the system will automatically begin sending the instructions to the various warehouses and suppliers to begin preparing the shipments. Once all those instructions have been sent to warehouses and suppliers the Requisition will move to ''Completed'' status (for certain configurations there are other steps between ''Outstanding'' and ''Completed'' see earlier note in section 5.5) this does not mean that the shipments against this Requisition have been completed just that the Requisition processing step has completed. To track the individual status for the shipments generated as a result of the Requisition follow the steps described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Checking what Quantities/ Items have been approved==&lt;br /&gt;
Once you receive the email telling you your requisition has been approved you can go to the &amp;quot;Create/ Review Requisitions&amp;quot; page (see section 5 above for how to navigate to this page). Your requisition will now be a status ''Complete'' (or for certain configurations it may have another status such as ''Fully Scheduled'', ''Fully Agreed'' etc. – see earlier notes above for details). To view the details, click the show icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_01.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_02.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The suggested quantity is what was proposed by the system (this will be zero for manually created requisitions). The requested quantity is what was requested by the station and the approved quantity is what has been approved. You can make an download a copy (in MS-Excel file format) of the confirmed quantities by pressing the ''Excel'' icon on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_002.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tracking the Individual Shipments against your Requisition==&lt;br /&gt;
As previously described a single Requisition can generate multiple shipments depending on the source of supply and the stock availability. To view the individual shipments against your Requisition you should press the &amp;quot;Tracking&amp;quot; tab from the screen described above, or by clicking the drop-down from the main ‘Create/ Review Requisitions’ page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_03.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''OR'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_04.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will show you all the shipment instructions generated as a result of your Requisition. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 3 different categories of shipment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Issue''' – Goods are to be issued from a Central/ Regional warehouse to your station.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Purchase Order''' – The goods are being shipped directly from a supplier to your station. &lt;br /&gt;
* '''Return''' – Means you have a surplus and you should return these goods as instructed by SkylogistiX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See below for an example of the screen you will see if you press the &amp;quot;Track&amp;quot; button as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_05.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the above example, the only type of shipments generated were Issues. There are three and the source in both cases is the Kuehne + Nagel Sutton Coldfield warehouse, we also see that they have been fully received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Against any issue, you can view the details of the issue by pressing the &amp;quot;Show&amp;quot; icon against the Issue you want to view in more detail. This will then show you the status/ tracking details of the Issue plus all the items on the issue as illustrated below;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_06.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the above example on the header section, we see that the issue has a Target Pick completion date of 24th November, and was actually picked and despatched on 24th November and arrived on the 25th November, a day late to the planned arrival date which was the 24th of November. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the line details we see the Confirmed Requisition Quantity per item and as well as the quantity shipped and the quantity received. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anything not shipped to you will go onto a backorder and will be shipped via a separate issue which can be viewed in the same way as the main issue.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_Index&amp;diff=3101</id>
		<title>Requisition Index</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_Index&amp;diff=3101"/>
		<updated>2023-07-13T08:03:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Tips and tricks}}&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating Manual Requisitions=&lt;br /&gt;
Typically, you will create a Requisition from scratch if you want to order 1 or a small number of items outside your regular ordering sequence due to some unforeseen circumstance. If you need to order a lot of items, you will find it quicker to create the Requisition from a pre-stored template but see the below [[#Creating a New Requisition from a Template|''''Creating a New Requisition from a Template'''']] for more details on this, and also this [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/?title=Requisition_ManageStationTemplates '''link''']] for maintaining the template.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Requisition from scratch you should take the add icon from the Create/ Review Requisitions page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_1.PNG|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following page will be displayed;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_2.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the header section you enter the date you require the goods by and any comment you may like to record. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the detail section, you add the items you want by pressing the add icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will then display a screen allowing you to select the item (You simply select an item by pressing the &amp;quot;Select&amp;quot; button, if you don’t see the item you want you can page through until you find it or use the filters by clicking the three dots on each column) and then add the required quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_4.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter a quantity that is not a multiple of the default pack size, you will get the following pop-up in which you will need to detail whether to round up or down accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_5.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After entering the header section and when you press the add button to select detail or you press the &amp;quot;Save&amp;quot; button the system performs a check to see if the date you requested is possible if it is not you will see a message similar to the one below;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_6.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have added a line you will be returned to the page where you see the lines added so far and you can add another line by pressing Add Icon again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_7.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submitting your Requisitions==&lt;br /&gt;
You can continue to add lines until you have entered all the items you need. When you are ready to submit your Requisition to SkylogistiX press the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button. After this, you will no longer be able to add to this Requisition so only press Submit when you have entered everything. If you wish to save and come back to the Requisition later use &amp;quot;Save and Exit&amp;quot; to save your work in this case the status of the Requisition will stay &amp;quot;Pre-Manual Submit&amp;quot; and you can come back to it later. Once you press Submit the status will change to &amp;quot;Awaiting Approval&amp;quot; which means SkylogistiX will review it. You will receive an email advising you that the Requisition has been successfully submitted for review.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the main Create/Review Requisitions screen you will see that it is now at &amp;quot;Awaiting Approval&amp;quot; status – see below example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_8.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Creating a New Requisition from a Template=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can create new Templates or maintain your existing Templates by pressing the 'Lightening Bolt' icon from the main &amp;quot;Create/ Review Requisitions&amp;quot; page;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_9.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you press &amp;quot;Manage Templates&amp;quot; you will see a list of any existing templates for your station;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_10.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example above there is a template stored call &amp;quot;LAX Template&amp;quot;, to see the items in the template click the drop-down arrow;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_11.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wanted to create a Requisition from this Template press the &amp;quot;Create&amp;quot; button. This will automatically create a new Requisition with all the items that are defined on the Template. In the example below, you can see the Requisition with 6 items has been created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_12.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here you can edit the Quantities, add new lines or delete lines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_pic_13.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then once ready you can submit your Requisition like in the example [[#Submitting your Requisitions|'''here''']] which was referenced above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Reviewing an Automated Requisition=&lt;br /&gt;
Depending upon your station configuration, requisitions could be automatically generated by the system. The requisition will be available for your review on the “Create/ Review Requisitions” page. It is suggested to review the requisition within one workday from the requisition “Creation Date”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Take the “Edit” icon of the requisition with “Awaiting Station Review” status:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 01.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be presented with the requisition details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 02.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Requisition Totals''' – Total calculated weight, volume, and number of pallets of the requisition quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Requisition No''' – The number of the requisition.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Required Date''' – This date is calculated by the system and reflects the date which the goods need to arrive at the station by (if there are multiple dates at the line-level, the header level date will be the earliest of the line-level dates).&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Comment''' (Optional) – Enter a Comment.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Client Order Note''' (Optional) – Enter a Client Order Note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add items not listed in the requisition with the “Add” icon. Refer to the “Add Item” screen explanation in the [[#Creating Manual Requisitions|''''Creating Manual Requisitions'''']] section 1 above:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated_Req_03.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check the “Requested Qty” of each item fulfills your station inventory requirements from the “Required Date” till the Next Planned Arrival.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When “Suggested Qty” is negative, there is too much stock in the station. Then, depending on your station configuration, “Requested Qty” could be automatically set to zero or your station could be required to return stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the detail section, you can review the item data by pressing the expand arrow at the item level (this aopears on the far left hand side of the data grid):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req Arrow 04.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will then display a screen with the “Requisition Detail”, “Item Parameters”, and “Explain Forecast” tabs, containing the explanation and the base data used to calculate the Suggested Quantity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 05.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The calculated inventory requirement is based on the most recent approved count for the station &amp;amp; material (dates may differ depending upon station count category confoiguratins and other factors, the “In-Transit Quantity” consider en route to your station, the “Days Between Delivery/Orders”, and the forecast set up. If you edit the “Requested Qty” to a different number, a “Comment” may need to be provided as explanation as to why you wish to send a different quantity than has been forecasted (again, a comment may or may not be required depending on configuration):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 06.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom of the page click on the “Accept” button to confirm the order, meaning that you havce reviewed for all lines on the requisition and you agree with or you have adjusted the requested quantities accordingly for each material on the order. Once submitted, the requisition will be reviewed by your Station Provisioning Manager, who will approve the orders (warehouse-shipments and possible direct purchase orders) to your station.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE:''' Your station provisioning manager has the ability to adjust the quantities prior to approving the requisition, so the quantity you request may not be the final quantity that is shipped.  Furthermore, &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Automated Req 07.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Tracking a Requisition Status=&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have submitted a requisition, as described in the section above, the next step is a review by an authorised planner, often a SkylogistiX employee in the material planning operations team. As previously described, until that review takes place the requisition will be at ''Awaiting Approval'' status. Once it has been reviewed by the authorised planner, the status will move to either ''Rejected'' or ''Outstanding'' and you will receive an email telling you that the requisition has now been approved or rejected. If approved, it is possible that not all the items and quantities you requested have been approved and therefore some of the quantities you requested may have been altered. If you want to check which materials havce been approved and the final approved-quantities, please follow the steps described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The requisition will not stay at the ''Outstanding'' status very long because as soon as it reaches ''Outstanding'' status the system will automatically begin sending the instructions to the various warehouses and suppliers to begin preparing the shipments. Once all those instructions have been sent to warehouses and suppliers the Requisition will move to ''Completed'' status (for certain configurations there are other steps between ''Outstanding'' and ''Completed'' see earlier note in section 5.5) this does not mean that the shipments against this Requisition have been completed just that the Requisition processing step has completed. To track the individual status for the shipments generated as a result of the Requisition follow the steps described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Checking what Quantities/ Items have been approved==&lt;br /&gt;
Once you receive the email telling you your requisition has been approved you can go to the &amp;quot;Create/ Review Requisitions&amp;quot; page (see section 5 above for how to navigate to this page). Your requisition will now be a status ''Complete'' (or for certain configurations it may have another status such as ''Fully Scheduled'', ''Fully Agreed'' etc. – see earlier notes above for details). To view the details, click the show icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_01.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_02.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The suggested quantity is what was proposed by the system (this will be zero for manually created requisitions). The requested quantity is what was requested by the station and the approved quantity is what has been approved. You can make an download a copy (in MS-Excel file format) of the confirmed quantities by pressing the ''Excel'' icon on the toolbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_002.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tracking the Individual Shipments against your Requisition==&lt;br /&gt;
As previously described a single Requisition can generate multiple shipments depending on the source of supply and the stock availability. To view the individual shipments against your Requisition you should press the &amp;quot;Tracking&amp;quot; tab from the screen described above, or by clicking the drop-down from the main ‘Create/ Review Requisitions’ page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_03.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''OR'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_04.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will show you all the shipment instructions generated as a result of your Requisition. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 3 different categories of shipment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Issue''' – Goods are to be issued from a Central/ Regional warehouse to your station.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Purchase Order''' – The goods are being shipped directly from a supplier to your station. &lt;br /&gt;
* '''Return''' – Means you have a surplus and you should return these goods as instructed by SkylogistiX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See below for an example of the screen you will see if you press the &amp;quot;Track&amp;quot; button as described above.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_05.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the above example, the only type of shipments generated were Issues. There are three and the source in both cases is the Kuehne + Nagel Sutton Coldfield warehouse, we also see that they have been fully received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Against any issue, you can view the details of the issue by pressing the &amp;quot;Show&amp;quot; icon against the Issue you want to view in more detail. This will then show you the status/ tracking details of the Issue plus all the items on the issue as illustrated below;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req_06.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the above example on the header section, we see that the issue has a Target Pick completion date of 24th November, and was actually picked and despatched on 24th November and arrived on the 25th November, a day late to the planned arrival date which was the 24th of November. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the line details we see the Confirmed Requisition Quantity per item and as well as the quantity shipped and the quantity received. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Anything not shipped to you will go onto a backorder and will be shipped via a separate issue which can be viewed in the same way as the main issue.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose&amp;diff=3031</id>
		<title>RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose&amp;diff=3031"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T16:47:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: /* Automotive Supply Chain Industry */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Airline (Inflight Catering) Industry=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are unsure which Job Role option to choose, here is some helpful advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are employed by a service-oriented company or work within an airline subsidiary operation, involved in activities such as:&lt;br /&gt;
** catering&lt;br /&gt;
** airport services including ground handling, cleaning, maintenance etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** equipment refurbishment&lt;br /&gt;
** ticketing operations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Consumer (End Customer)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are employed by an airline or a group of airlines and have a head office function, then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Client Head Office Staff&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are involved in warehousing operations or you provide transportation/freight forwarding services then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Provider of Logistics (3PL) services&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a  company that supplies equipment, food &amp;amp; beverages or other products consumed during flights, then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Supplier/Vendor&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Lastly, if you are an employee of SkyLogistiX either directly or through any of its parent companies, including Kuehne+Nagel or Gate Gourmet (formerly LSG SkyChefs Europe), please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Control Tower Staff (SkylogistiX/KN)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Automotive Supply Chain Industry=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are unsure which Job Role option to choose, here is some helpful advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a manufacturer who is supplying parts that will be used in the assembly of a vehicle, please choose the option: '''Supplier/Vendor'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If work for the company who market the vehicle being produced, please choose the option: '''Client Head Office Staff'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a company who provide 3PL (warehousing, transport and logistics) services then please choose the option: '''Provider of (3PL) Logistics Services'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for the organization that is responsible for the plant in which vehicles are assembled, please select: '''Consumer (End Customer)'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for SkylogistiX GmbH or you work at a consolidation center, then please select: '''Control Tower Staff (SkylogistiX/KN)'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose&amp;diff=3030</id>
		<title>RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose&amp;diff=3030"/>
		<updated>2023-01-10T16:45:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Airline (Inflight Catering) Industry=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are unsure which Job Role option to choose, here is some helpful advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are employed by a service-oriented company or work within an airline subsidiary operation, involved in activities such as:&lt;br /&gt;
** catering&lt;br /&gt;
** airport services including ground handling, cleaning, maintenance etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** equipment refurbishment&lt;br /&gt;
** ticketing operations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Consumer (End Customer)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are employed by an airline or a group of airlines and have a head office function, then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Client Head Office Staff&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are involved in warehousing operations or you provide transportation/freight forwarding services then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Provider of Logistics (3PL) services&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a  company that supplies equipment, food &amp;amp; beverages or other products consumed during flights, then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Supplier/Vendor&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Lastly, if you are an employee of SkyLogistiX either directly or through any of its parent companies, including Kuehne+Nagel or Gate Gourmet (formerly LSG SkyChefs Europe), please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Control Tower Staff (SkylogistiX/KN)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Automotive Supply Chain Industry=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are unsure which Job Role option to choose, here is some helpful advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a manufacturer who is supplying parts that will be used in the assembly of a vehicle, please choose the option: '''Supplier/Vendor'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If work for the company who market the vehicle being produced, please choose the option: '''Client Head Office Staff'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a company who provide 3PL (warehousing, transport and logistics) services then please choose the option: '''Provider of (3PL) Logistics Services'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for the organization that is responsible for the plant in which vehicles are assembled, please select: '''Consumer (End Customer)'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:StockItemMassUpdate_Sample.xlsx&amp;diff=3004</id>
		<title>File:StockItemMassUpdate Sample.xlsx</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:StockItemMassUpdate_Sample.xlsx&amp;diff=3004"/>
		<updated>2022-10-24T15:34:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;An example file which illustrates what is expected if the number-of-uses property for multiple rotable materials is updated en mass (via a file uploaded through the Skysuite web portal)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_UnplannedIndex&amp;diff=2991</id>
		<title>Substitution UnplannedIndex</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_UnplannedIndex&amp;diff=2991"/>
		<updated>2022-09-12T16:05:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Tips and tricks}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Unplanned Substitutions=&lt;br /&gt;
==Summary==&lt;br /&gt;
Unplanned substitutions allows for the short to mid-term substitution of a stock item for a single alternative with respect to station replenishment in situations where a particular item is no longer available for order due to any number of possible reasons such as deemed unfit for purpose, have supply problems, or even that demand has exceeded expected demand and an insufficient quantity was ordered. There are a lot of situations in which an unplanned substitution would need to be actioned, but it is not ideal for your airline as it may affect the passengers experience if the replacement item varies significantly from the original item that had been planned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unplanned substitutions principally affect DRP but may also affect MRP too (if client is using that module). For DRP, unplanned substitutions have relevance for both automatically generated requisitions and also manually created requisitions although note, unplanned substitutions have no relevance for SAP-Centric clients as material substitutions are managed entirely in SAP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up an unplanned substitute request is, as the name implies, a reactive response to a problem rather than one that is pre-planned months in advance. A substitute request is raised within the SkyLog Portal, after which it is subject to a simple approval sign off by an authorised user before waiting for activation by the system. Activation could be immediate, or could occur in the near future. The activation period of the substitution has both a start and end date, after which the substitution will be de-activated and orders comprising the original item will be allowed to continue unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a Unplanned Substitution==&lt;br /&gt;
===1. Initial Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
To set up an unplanned substitution navigate to the 'unplanned substitutions' page within SkyLog and click the add new record button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are then able to setup a new substitute request from the next screen as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:UnplannedSubstitution3.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An explanation of the options is as follows (* = Non-Mandatory);&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Reason''' - A list of different reasons are pickable, these identify why the substitution is being set up such as 'defective goods' for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Stock Item''' - This is the stock item that is required to be substituted.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Substitute Stock Item''' - The replacement stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Should a Conversion Factor Be Applied?''' - This should be set if the weight or volume of the product differs.  So for example, the item that would regularly ship is a 500ml bottle of water but tempoarily, a 600ml water product will ship instead.  If a conversion factor is not set for the substitution then if SkyLog were to 300 bottles of the 500ml product, then SkyLog will create the order with 300x bottles of the 600ml product.  If a conversation factor is set though, SkyLog will send more or less of the replacement item, e.g. 500ml * 300 is 150L, 150L divided by 600ml = 250 bottles.  See ER #30049 for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Urgent''' - Selecting 'Urgent' will set the 'Date From' automatically to today, but is also used for identifying and reporting urgent substitutions.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Date From''' - The date you want the substitution to start.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Date To''' - The date you want the substitution to end.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Substitute Complete Network''' - If the substitution is for all stations across your network then select 'Yes', if it is station specific select 'No'.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Send Email Alerts''' - This will send emails to all relevant users to inform them of the substitution.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Summary''' - A quick text summary of the substitution plus.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Comment*''' - Any additional comments can be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the mandatory fields are entered you can either 'Save and Continue' or 'Save and Exit', selecting 'Save and Continue' will enable you to then select stations affected (if 'Substitute Complete Network' was set to 'No').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2. Additional Information===&lt;br /&gt;
As per above if you selected 'Save and Continue' you can now add notes and attachments relating to the substitution and/or affected stations, if you saved and exited you can navigate back to your new record from the main unplanned substitutions screen. For either section, simply click the add new record button to upload documents or select relevant stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_3.PNG|750px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Note: Section 'Affected Stations' will only be displayed if 'Substitute Complete Network' = 'No'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3. Submission===&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the information you want to add to the substitution is complete, you will need to submit it for review by your airlines 'User Responsible for Approval of Substitutes'. Simply click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_4.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4. Additional Changes===&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to edit all information on your substitution prior to submission, but once submitted and prior to approval you cannot edit and are required to wait until it is 'Approved' or 'Active'. But when in these statuses though you can only alter the date or cancel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_5.PNG|750px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Process/ Statuses for Unplanned Substitutions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved/ Rejected===&lt;br /&gt;
Once your new substitution has been submitted it will now have to be approved by your airlines 'User Responsible for Approval of Substitutes', they will receive an email alert that a new substitution has been logged and requires their approval. They have the option to approve or reject, if they do reject your substitution then its status will be set to 'Rejected' and its workflow terminated meaning that you will need to log a new substitution as the previous one will no longer be editable. If the substitution is approved its status will become 'Active' as soon as the 'Date From' is elapsed, until that time though it will stay at 'Approved'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Active===&lt;br /&gt;
As per the above section, once the substitution has been approved the status becomes 'Active' as long as the 'Date From' is elapsed, but if todays date is prior to the 'Date From' then the status will stay as 'Approved'. But as soon as it is 'Active' all station orders (requisitions), for stations affected by the substitution, will use the replacement item until the status of the substitution is no longer 'Active'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Complete===&lt;br /&gt;
Completed substitutions are ones that have elapsed their 'Date To' which was initially set when the substitution was set up, or if the already active substitution has its 'Date To' manually set to a date in the past as detailed above in section &amp;quot;4. Additional setup&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cancelled===&lt;br /&gt;
If for some reason that prior to the substitution becoming active, such as the stock out issue is resolved, you can cancel it by simply by editing the 'Provisional', 'Approved' or 'Active' status substitution and selecting 'Cancel' (or, for some statuses, 'Close').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_C.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Impact of Substitutions in SkyLog==&lt;br /&gt;
Substitutions are vital for your airline, as soon as they become active various modules of SkyLog are affected, such as station orders (Requisitions), station par levels and forecasts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Requisitions===&lt;br /&gt;
Once an unplanned substitution is active any requisitions created for a station, affected by the substitution, will reflect the item nominated to temporarily replace the original stock item. Each substitute line will be highlighted so that all parties are aware, clicking the substitute wheel icon will also show you the original item;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_6.PNG|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a requisition manually, users can do so via a template or manually line by line, but when selecting the original item a substitute wheel icon will be displayed and the substitute item will instead be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_7.PNG|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when creating a manual requisition, if the user selects an item for the requisition that has an active substitution then the portal will display a popup informing them that the item will be substituted and they should adjust quantities of the substitute appropriately;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_8.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Par Levels===&lt;br /&gt;
You will find that items being used as a substitutes at (all or specific) stations may be of a different status before and after the substitution has been activated and deactivated. Below is a breakdown of each scenario; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Situation before Substitution (SPLs only)&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Action on activation of substitute request on SPL records&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Action on completion of Substitution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Phase Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item updated to 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item moved back to 'Phased Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Provisional'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item advanced to 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item does not exist&lt;br /&gt;
|Item created as 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item updated to 'Phased Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_UnplannedIndex&amp;diff=2990</id>
		<title>Substitution UnplannedIndex</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_UnplannedIndex&amp;diff=2990"/>
		<updated>2022-09-12T16:03:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Tips and tricks}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Unplanned Substitutions=&lt;br /&gt;
==Summary==&lt;br /&gt;
Unplanned substitutions allows for the short to mid-term substitution of a stock item for a single alternative with respect to station replenishment in situations where a particular item is no longer available for order due to any number of possible reasons such as deemed unfit for purpose, have supply problems, or even that demand has exceeded expected demand and an insufficient quantity was ordered. There are a lot of situations in which an unplanned substitution would need to be actioned, but it is not ideal for your airline as it may affect the passengers experience if the replacement item varies significantly from the original item that had been planned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unplanned substitutions principally affect DRP but may also affect MRP too (if client is using that module). For DRP, unplanned substitutions have relevance for both automatically generated requisitions and also manually created requisitions although note, unplanned substitutions have no relevance for SAP-Centric clients as material substitutions are managed entirely in SAP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up an unplanned substitute request is, as the name implies, a reactive response to a problem rather than one that is pre-planned months in advance. A substitute request is raised within the SkyLog Portal, after which it is subject to a simple approval sign off by an authorised user before waiting for activation by the system. Activation could be immediate, or could occur in the near future. The activation period of the substitution has both a start and end date, after which the substitution will be de-activated and orders comprising the original item will be allowed to continue unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a Unplanned Substitution==&lt;br /&gt;
===1. Initial Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
To set up an unplanned substitution navigate to the 'unplanned substitutions' page within SkyLog and click the add new record button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are then able to setup a new substitute request from the next screen as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:UnplannedSubstitutions3.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An explanation of the options is as follows (* = Non-Mandatory);&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Reason''' - A list of different reasons are pickable, these identify why the substitution is being set up such as 'defective goods' for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Stock Item''' - This is the stock item that is required to be substituted.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Substitute Stock Item''' - The replacement stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Should a Conversion Factor Be Applied?''' - This should be set if the weight or volume of the product differs.  So for example, the item that would regularly ship is a 500ml bottle of water but tempoarily, a 600ml water product will ship instead.  If a conversion factor is not set for the substitution then if SkyLog were to 300 bottles of the 500ml product, then SkyLog will create the order with 300x bottles of the 600ml product.  If a conversation factor is set though, SkyLog will send more or less of the replacement item, e.g. 500ml * 300 is 150L, 150L divided by 600ml = 250 bottles.  See ER #30049 for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Urgent''' - Selecting 'Urgent' will set the 'Date From' automatically to today, but is also used for identifying and reporting urgent substitutions.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Date From''' - The date you want the substitution to start.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Date To''' - The date you want the substitution to end.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Substitute Complete Network''' - If the substitution is for all stations across your network then select 'Yes', if it is station specific select 'No'.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Send Email Alerts''' - This will send emails to all relevant users to inform them of the substitution.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Summary''' - A quick text summary of the substitution plus.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Comment*''' - Any additional comments can be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the mandatory fields are entered you can either 'Save and Continue' or 'Save and Exit', selecting 'Save and Continue' will enable you to then select stations affected (if 'Substitute Complete Network' was set to 'No').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2. Additional Information===&lt;br /&gt;
As per above if you selected 'Save and Continue' you can now add notes and attachments relating to the substitution and/or affected stations, if you saved and exited you can navigate back to your new record from the main unplanned substitutions screen. For either section, simply click the add new record button to upload documents or select relevant stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_3.PNG|750px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Note: Section 'Affected Stations' will only be displayed if 'Substitute Complete Network' = 'No'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3. Submission===&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the information you want to add to the substitution is complete, you will need to submit it for review by your airlines 'User Responsible for Approval of Substitutes'. Simply click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_4.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4. Additional Changes===&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to edit all information on your substitution prior to submission, but once submitted and prior to approval you cannot edit and are required to wait until it is 'Approved' or 'Active'. But when in these statuses though you can only alter the date or cancel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_5.PNG|750px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Process/ Statuses for Unplanned Substitutions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved/ Rejected===&lt;br /&gt;
Once your new substitution has been submitted it will now have to be approved by your airlines 'User Responsible for Approval of Substitutes', they will receive an email alert that a new substitution has been logged and requires their approval. They have the option to approve or reject, if they do reject your substitution then its status will be set to 'Rejected' and its workflow terminated meaning that you will need to log a new substitution as the previous one will no longer be editable. If the substitution is approved its status will become 'Active' as soon as the 'Date From' is elapsed, until that time though it will stay at 'Approved'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Active===&lt;br /&gt;
As per the above section, once the substitution has been approved the status becomes 'Active' as long as the 'Date From' is elapsed, but if todays date is prior to the 'Date From' then the status will stay as 'Approved'. But as soon as it is 'Active' all station orders (requisitions), for stations affected by the substitution, will use the replacement item until the status of the substitution is no longer 'Active'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Complete===&lt;br /&gt;
Completed substitutions are ones that have elapsed their 'Date To' which was initially set when the substitution was set up, or if the already active substitution has its 'Date To' manually set to a date in the past as detailed above in section &amp;quot;4. Additional setup&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cancelled===&lt;br /&gt;
If for some reason that prior to the substitution becoming active, such as the stock out issue is resolved, you can cancel it by simply by editing the 'Provisional', 'Approved' or 'Active' status substitution and selecting 'Cancel' (or, for some statuses, 'Close').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_C.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Impact of Substitutions in SkyLog==&lt;br /&gt;
Substitutions are vital for your airline, as soon as they become active various modules of SkyLog are affected, such as station orders (Requisitions), station par levels and forecasts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Requisitions===&lt;br /&gt;
Once an unplanned substitution is active any requisitions created for a station, affected by the substitution, will reflect the item nominated to temporarily replace the original stock item. Each substitute line will be highlighted so that all parties are aware, clicking the substitute wheel icon will also show you the original item;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_6.PNG|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a requisition manually, users can do so via a template or manually line by line, but when selecting the original item a substitute wheel icon will be displayed and the substitute item will instead be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_7.PNG|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when creating a manual requisition, if the user selects an item for the requisition that has an active substitution then the portal will display a popup informing them that the item will be substituted and they should adjust quantities of the substitute appropriately;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_8.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Par Levels===&lt;br /&gt;
You will find that items being used as a substitutes at (all or specific) stations may be of a different status before and after the substitution has been activated and deactivated. Below is a breakdown of each scenario; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Situation before Substitution (SPLs only)&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Action on activation of substitute request on SPL records&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Action on completion of Substitution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Phase Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item updated to 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item moved back to 'Phased Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Provisional'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item advanced to 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item does not exist&lt;br /&gt;
|Item created as 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item updated to 'Phased Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_UnplannedIndex&amp;diff=2989</id>
		<title>Substitution UnplannedIndex</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_UnplannedIndex&amp;diff=2989"/>
		<updated>2022-09-12T16:01:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Tips and tricks}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Unplanned Substitutions=&lt;br /&gt;
==Summary==&lt;br /&gt;
Unplanned substitutions allows for the short to mid-term substitution of a stock item for a single alternative with respect to station replenishment in situations where a particular item is no longer available for order due to any number of possible reasons such as deemed unfit for purpose, have supply problems, or even that demand has exceeded expected demand and an insufficient quantity was ordered. There are a lot of situations in which an unplanned substitution would need to be actioned, but it is not ideal for your airline as it may affect the passengers experience if the replacement item varies significantly from the original item that had been planned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unplanned substitutions principally affect DRP but may also affect MRP too (if client is using that module). For DRP, unplanned substitutions have relevance for both automatically generated requisitions and also manually created requisitions although note, unplanned substitutions have no relevance for SAP-Centric clients as material substitutions are managed entirely in SAP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up an unplanned substitute request is, as the name implies, a reactive response to a problem rather than one that is pre-planned months in advance. A substitute request is raised within the SkyLog Portal, after which it is subject to a simple approval sign off by an authorised user before waiting for activation by the system. Activation could be immediate, or could occur in the near future. The activation period of the substitution has both a start and end date, after which the substitution will be de-activated and orders comprising the original item will be allowed to continue unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a Unplanned Substitution==&lt;br /&gt;
===1. Initial Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
To set up an unplanned substitution navigate to the 'unplanned substitutions' page within SkyLog and click the add new record button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are then able to setup a new substitute request from the next screen as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:UnplannedSubstitutions3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An explanation of the options is as follows (* = Non-Mandatory);&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Reason''' - A list of different reasons are pickable, these identify why the substitution is being set up such as 'defective goods' for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Stock Item''' - This is the stock item that is required to be substituted.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Substitute Stock Item''' - The replacement stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Should a Conversion Factor Be Applied?''' - This should be set if the weight or volume of the product differs.  So for example, the item that would regularly ship is a 500ml bottle of water but tempoarily, a 600ml water product will ship instead.  If a conversion factor is not set for the substitution then if SkyLog were to 300 bottles of the 500ml product, then SkyLog will create the order with 300x bottles of the 600ml product.  If a conversation factor is set though, SkyLog will send more or less of the replacement item, e.g. 500ml * 300 is 150L, 150L divided by 600ml = 250 bottles.  See ER #30049 for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Urgent''' - Selecting 'Urgent' will set the 'Date From' automatically to today, but is also used for identifying and reporting urgent substitutions.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Date From''' - The date you want the substitution to start.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Date To''' - The date you want the substitution to end.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Substitute Complete Network''' - If the substitution is for all stations across your network then select 'Yes', if it is station specific select 'No'.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Send Email Alerts''' - This will send emails to all relevant users to inform them of the substitution.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Summary''' - A quick text summary of the substitution plus.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Comment*''' - Any additional comments can be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the mandatory fields are entered you can either 'Save and Continue' or 'Save and Exit', selecting 'Save and Continue' will enable you to then select stations affected (if 'Substitute Complete Network' was set to 'No').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2. Additional Information===&lt;br /&gt;
As per above if you selected 'Save and Continue' you can now add notes and attachments relating to the substitution and/or affected stations, if you saved and exited you can navigate back to your new record from the main unplanned substitutions screen. For either section, simply click the add new record button to upload documents or select relevant stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_3.PNG|750px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Note: Section 'Affected Stations' will only be displayed if 'Substitute Complete Network' = 'No'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3. Submission===&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the information you want to add to the substitution is complete, you will need to submit it for review by your airlines 'User Responsible for Approval of Substitutes'. Simply click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_4.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4. Additional Changes===&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to edit all information on your substitution prior to submission, but once submitted and prior to approval you cannot edit and are required to wait until it is 'Approved' or 'Active'. But when in these statuses though you can only alter the date or cancel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_5.PNG|750px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Process/ Statuses for Unplanned Substitutions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved/ Rejected===&lt;br /&gt;
Once your new substitution has been submitted it will now have to be approved by your airlines 'User Responsible for Approval of Substitutes', they will receive an email alert that a new substitution has been logged and requires their approval. They have the option to approve or reject, if they do reject your substitution then its status will be set to 'Rejected' and its workflow terminated meaning that you will need to log a new substitution as the previous one will no longer be editable. If the substitution is approved its status will become 'Active' as soon as the 'Date From' is elapsed, until that time though it will stay at 'Approved'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Active===&lt;br /&gt;
As per the above section, once the substitution has been approved the status becomes 'Active' as long as the 'Date From' is elapsed, but if todays date is prior to the 'Date From' then the status will stay as 'Approved'. But as soon as it is 'Active' all station orders (requisitions), for stations affected by the substitution, will use the replacement item until the status of the substitution is no longer 'Active'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Complete===&lt;br /&gt;
Completed substitutions are ones that have elapsed their 'Date To' which was initially set when the substitution was set up, or if the already active substitution has its 'Date To' manually set to a date in the past as detailed above in section &amp;quot;4. Additional setup&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cancelled===&lt;br /&gt;
If for some reason that prior to the substitution becoming active, such as the stock out issue is resolved, you can cancel it by simply by editing the 'Provisional', 'Approved' or 'Active' status substitution and selecting 'Cancel' (or, for some statuses, 'Close').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_C.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Impact of Substitutions in SkyLog==&lt;br /&gt;
Substitutions are vital for your airline, as soon as they become active various modules of SkyLog are affected, such as station orders (Requisitions), station par levels and forecasts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Requisitions===&lt;br /&gt;
Once an unplanned substitution is active any requisitions created for a station, affected by the substitution, will reflect the item nominated to temporarily replace the original stock item. Each substitute line will be highlighted so that all parties are aware, clicking the substitute wheel icon will also show you the original item;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_6.PNG|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a requisition manually, users can do so via a template or manually line by line, but when selecting the original item a substitute wheel icon will be displayed and the substitute item will instead be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_7.PNG|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when creating a manual requisition, if the user selects an item for the requisition that has an active substitution then the portal will display a popup informing them that the item will be substituted and they should adjust quantities of the substitute appropriately;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_8.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Par Levels===&lt;br /&gt;
You will find that items being used as a substitutes at (all or specific) stations may be of a different status before and after the substitution has been activated and deactivated. Below is a breakdown of each scenario; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Situation before Substitution (SPLs only)&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Action on activation of substitute request on SPL records&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Action on completion of Substitution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Phase Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item updated to 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item moved back to 'Phased Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Provisional'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item advanced to 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item does not exist&lt;br /&gt;
|Item created as 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item updated to 'Phased Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:UnplannedSubstitution3.PNG&amp;diff=2988</id>
		<title>File:UnplannedSubstitution3.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:UnplannedSubstitution3.PNG&amp;diff=2988"/>
		<updated>2022-09-12T16:00:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: Updated image to reflect additional controls introduced with ER #30049 where we now ask the user if a conversion factor should be applied.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Updated image to reflect additional controls introduced with ER #30049 where we now ask the user if a conversion factor should be applied.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_UnplannedIndex&amp;diff=2987</id>
		<title>Substitution UnplannedIndex</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_UnplannedIndex&amp;diff=2987"/>
		<updated>2022-09-12T15:55:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{Tips and tricks}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Unplanned Substitutions=&lt;br /&gt;
==Summary==&lt;br /&gt;
Unplanned substitutions allows for the short to mid-term substitution of a stock item for a single alternative with respect to station replenishment in situations where a particular item is no longer available for order due to any number of possible reasons such as deemed unfit for purpose, have supply problems, or even that demand has exceeded expected demand and an insufficient quantity was ordered. There are a lot of situations in which an unplanned substitution would need to be actioned, but it is not ideal for your airline as it may affect the passengers experience if the replacement item varies significantly from the original item that had been planned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unplanned substitutions principally affect DRP but may also affect MRP too (if client is using that module). For DRP, unplanned substitutions have relevance for both automatically generated requisitions and also manually created requisitions although note, unplanned substitutions have no relevance for SAP-Centric clients as material substitutions are managed entirely in SAP.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up an unplanned substitute request is, as the name implies, a reactive response to a problem rather than one that is pre-planned months in advance. A substitute request is raised within the SkyLog Portal, after which it is subject to a simple approval sign off by an authorised user before waiting for activation by the system. Activation could be immediate, or could occur in the near future. The activation period of the substitution has both a start and end date, after which the substitution will be de-activated and orders comprising the original item will be allowed to continue unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up a Unplanned Substitution==&lt;br /&gt;
===1. Initial Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
To set up an unplanned substitution navigate to the 'unplanned substitutions' page within SkyLog and click the add new record button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are then able to setup a new substitute request from the next screen as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_2.PNG|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An explanation of the options is as follows (* = Non-Mandatory);&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Reason''' - A list of different reasons are pickable, these identify why the substitution is being set up such as 'defective goods' for example.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Stock Item''' - This is the stock item that is required to be substituted.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Substitute Stock Item''' - The replacement stock item.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Should a Conversion Factor Be Applied?''' - This should be set if the weight or volume of the product differs.  So for example, the item that would regularly ship is a 500ml bottle of water but tempoarily, a 600ml water product will ship instead.  If a conversion factor is not set for the substitution then if SkyLog were to 300 bottles of the 500ml product, then SkyLog will create the order with 300x bottles of the 600ml product.  If a conversation factor is set though, SkyLog will send more or less of the replacement item, e.g. 500ml * 300 is 150L, 150L divided by 600ml = 250 bottles.  See ER #30049 for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Urgent''' - Selecting 'Urgent' will set the 'Date From' automatically to today, but is also used for identifying and reporting urgent substitutions.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Date From''' - The date you want the substitution to start.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Date To''' - The date you want the substitution to end.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Substitute Complete Network''' - If the substitution is for all stations across your network then select 'Yes', if it is station specific select 'No'.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Send Email Alerts''' - This will send emails to all relevant users to inform them of the substitution.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Summary''' - A quick text summary of the substitution plus.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Comment*''' - Any additional comments can be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all the mandatory fields are entered you can either 'Save and Continue' or 'Save and Exit', selecting 'Save and Continue' will enable you to then select stations affected (if 'Substitute Complete Network' was set to 'No').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===2. Additional Information===&lt;br /&gt;
As per above if you selected 'Save and Continue' you can now add notes and attachments relating to the substitution and/or affected stations, if you saved and exited you can navigate back to your new record from the main unplanned substitutions screen. For either section, simply click the add new record button to upload documents or select relevant stations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_3.PNG|750px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Note: Section 'Affected Stations' will only be displayed if 'Substitute Complete Network' = 'No'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===3. Submission===&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the information you want to add to the substitution is complete, you will need to submit it for review by your airlines 'User Responsible for Approval of Substitutes'. Simply click 'Submit' at the bottom of the page to do so. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_4.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===4. Additional Changes===&lt;br /&gt;
You are able to edit all information on your substitution prior to submission, but once submitted and prior to approval you cannot edit and are required to wait until it is 'Approved' or 'Active'. But when in these statuses though you can only alter the date or cancel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_5.PNG|750px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Process/ Statuses for Unplanned Substitutions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Approved/ Rejected===&lt;br /&gt;
Once your new substitution has been submitted it will now have to be approved by your airlines 'User Responsible for Approval of Substitutes', they will receive an email alert that a new substitution has been logged and requires their approval. They have the option to approve or reject, if they do reject your substitution then its status will be set to 'Rejected' and its workflow terminated meaning that you will need to log a new substitution as the previous one will no longer be editable. If the substitution is approved its status will become 'Active' as soon as the 'Date From' is elapsed, until that time though it will stay at 'Approved'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Active===&lt;br /&gt;
As per the above section, once the substitution has been approved the status becomes 'Active' as long as the 'Date From' is elapsed, but if todays date is prior to the 'Date From' then the status will stay as 'Approved'. But as soon as it is 'Active' all station orders (requisitions), for stations affected by the substitution, will use the replacement item until the status of the substitution is no longer 'Active'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Complete===&lt;br /&gt;
Completed substitutions are ones that have elapsed their 'Date To' which was initially set when the substitution was set up, or if the already active substitution has its 'Date To' manually set to a date in the past as detailed above in section &amp;quot;4. Additional setup&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cancelled===&lt;br /&gt;
If for some reason that prior to the substitution becoming active, such as the stock out issue is resolved, you can cancel it by simply by editing the 'Provisional', 'Approved' or 'Active' status substitution and selecting 'Cancel' (or, for some statuses, 'Close').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_C.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Impact of Substitutions in SkyLog==&lt;br /&gt;
Substitutions are vital for your airline, as soon as they become active various modules of SkyLog are affected, such as station orders (Requisitions), station par levels and forecasts. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Requisitions===&lt;br /&gt;
Once an unplanned substitution is active any requisitions created for a station, affected by the substitution, will reflect the item nominated to temporarily replace the original stock item. Each substitute line will be highlighted so that all parties are aware, clicking the substitute wheel icon will also show you the original item;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_6.PNG|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a requisition manually, users can do so via a template or manually line by line, but when selecting the original item a substitute wheel icon will be displayed and the substitute item will instead be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_7.PNG|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similarly, when creating a manual requisition, if the user selects an item for the requisition that has an active substitution then the portal will display a popup informing them that the item will be substituted and they should adjust quantities of the substitute appropriately;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Unplanned_Subs_8.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Par Levels===&lt;br /&gt;
You will find that items being used as a substitutes at (all or specific) stations may be of a different status before and after the substitution has been activated and deactivated. Below is a breakdown of each scenario; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;text-align: center;&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Situation before Substitution (SPLs only)&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Action on activation of substitute request on SPL records&lt;br /&gt;
! style=&amp;quot;color:black&amp;quot; | Action on completion of Substitution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Phase Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item updated to 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item moved back to 'Phased Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item already exists as 'Provisional'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item advanced to 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|No update&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
|The substitute item does not exist&lt;br /&gt;
|Item created as 'Active'&lt;br /&gt;
|Item updated to 'Phased Out'&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Station_Index&amp;diff=2979</id>
		<title>Station Index</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Station_Index&amp;diff=2979"/>
		<updated>2022-08-03T09:32:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Tips and tricks}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Summary=&lt;br /&gt;
A station is an Organization that provides flight or passenger services to an airline at an airport. This includes caterers, cabin cleaners, and other ground handling service providers as well as passenger lounges and ticketing agencies. In order for a Station record to exist, there must first be an Organization and OrganizationSite to which that Station can be linked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Create organization=&lt;br /&gt;
Organization refers to the company as a whole e.g. Lufthansa, Gate Group, or Coca-Cola, underneath the Organization there can be multiple OrganizationSites (see below). In order to be linked to a Station, the Organization type must be &amp;quot;Caterer/Service Provider&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
First, please check if the Organization already exists in SkyLog. Here you can find the list of all Organizations [[https://rsprod.skylogportal.com/Organization'''link''']]. If the Organization already exists please move to the next step. Organizations are centrally controlled and maintained to avoid duplicate organizations being created across multiple operations, therefore if the Organization does not exist contact a Global Administrator or raise a support request.  [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Organization_Index '''For more details about Organizations click here''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Organization Sites=&lt;br /&gt;
An Organization site represents a physical location from which the Organization operates, the site record contains the physical address of the location as well as the main site contact details and the timezone of that site. The site record must exist before you can create a Station record or for that matter any other supply chain participant type such as AirlineSupplier, Warehouse, etc. Firstly Please check if a site is already created in SkyLog with the same address and linked to the same Organization, it is important not to duplicate organization sites. [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=OrganizationSite_Index '''For more details about Organization Sites click here''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Stations=&lt;br /&gt;
The station setup contains specifications of that station's operations such as the frequency it should report inventory of airline-owned items and a list (StationItems) of the airline-owned items it needs to provide the services to the airline. Against each item, we record the par levels e.g. how many days of inventory to hold, the frequency of replenishment, the replenishment source and lead time, etc. SkyLog allows you to define at the station level many parameters to customize stations processes. For example, automatic stock count approvals, different ways of RMA management, and the level of automation within process flows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Stations creation==&lt;br /&gt;
To create a station record a few things are required to be confirmed: station setup, Supply sources, &lt;br /&gt;
You can start creating a new station by going to Reference Data/Airline Participants/Stations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateStationRef.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SkyLog allows advanced customization of the station processes. To deliver the most productive setup please consult the guide below which explains each customization option on the page&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- TODO: This table should be updated to use wikitext format rather than HTML --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Field&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Station Site&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Link to Organization site. It is the source of the Station address that is printed on invoices, transport bills  and communicated to 3rd parties&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Airport&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Every station must have link to the airport it services. If a single OrganizationSite serves two or more airports then you should create a station record for each airport served.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Service Type&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Assign relevant station type, e.g. &amp;quot;Caterer&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Airport Lounge&amp;quot;,&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Active&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;It is a yes /no field that can only be active once all the requirements have been sent up.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Valid From&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Date of start of operations.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Valid To&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Date of station closure. If not known or open ended leave blank.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Station Provisioning Manager&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The person who will be responsible for the provisioning/replenishment of goods for the station (i.e. who will approve requisition requests, inventory reports, etc.). This will be a person within the Airline or the Airline's 3rd party Control Tower&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Person Responsible for Counts&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The person to be assigned (from users registered in SkyLog) who will be responsible for stock counts, this will be someone within the organization of the Station. The selected person will be the recipient of related notifications such as reminders to count, shipment notifications and various escalations/alerts regarding Station Provisioning and Inventory Management&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Is Station Independent from Skylog?&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Station exists within Skylog but is not expected to have any interactions via the UI (Portal)with Skylog &amp;amp;ndash; if the station will raise requisitions in SkyLog and/or be expected to submit inventory reports then this setting should always be set as 'No'. Typically this will only be set to 'Yes' if the Station uses their own systems to submit inventory counts and place requisitions and there is an interface between that system and SkyLog&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Automatically Generate Requisitions?&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Yes/No field will either allow (if yes) to generate automatic requisitions after a stock count, via schedule or even manually. If no, only manual orders are allowed to be placed by station. Setting to No is more common for lounges.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Include Non Orderable Items in Requisitions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Typically, Skylog only permits 'current' materials to be requisitioned. However, some users prefer to see all materials on the requisition so that they can make informed judgements, including temporary materials which may have been supplied in the past in place of a regular material (e.g. substitute materials where the station par level status = &amp;quot;Temp/Sub&amp;quot;). If the station wishes to see such temporary/substitute items on requisitions then this configuration flag should be set as 'Yes', otherwise, set as 'No'.  This setting is often enabled for stations for SAP-Centric clients.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Generate Automatic Requisitions Upon Count Approval&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This can only be set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; if &amp;quot;Will Requisitions Be Automatically Generated for This Station?&amp;quot; is also set to &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;. If set as &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; then Skylog will create a new automatic-requisition when an inventory count is approved - this relies upon station par levels being configured for event-driven requisitioning though. If you would prefer that automatic-requisitions are triggered for this station based upon an automatic schedule cycle* then this setting should be configured as &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;. * - If you do wish to trigger automatic requisitions based upon an automatic schedule then &amp;quot;Will Requisitions Be Automatically Generated For This Station?&amp;quot; should be set as &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; and each material to be included (for automatic requisitioning) should be set as Schedule-driven requisitioning - if set as such, you will be prompted to provide a next requisition trigger date; such configuration is achieved via the station par levels for this station.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Keep Back Orders?&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;When a new requisition is processed should Skylog retain existing back-orders? If Skylog should discard open back-orders upon processing a new requisition, set this configuration flag to 'No'. Otherwise, if Skylog should leave the decision as to whether a back-order is cancelled or processed to a member of the operational team then set this configuration flag to 'Yes'.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Confirm RMA Shipments?&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;If the configuration flag is set as 'No' it is not necessary for the station to confirm the despatch for a RMA. If the configuration flag is set as 'Yes' then the station returning the goods must confirm the despatch.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Automatic Requisition Negative Numbers Default to Zero&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;If Skylog believes that the station has too much stock, it will suggest a negative order quantity in the requisition. If the station does not wish to return such goods, then the requested quantity should be set as zero &amp;amp;ndash; meaning that the line/position will be ignored by Skylog. With this configuration flag set as 'Yes', Skylog will automatically set the requested number from a negative value to zero. If this configuration is set as 'No' then the requested quantity will always default to suggested order quantity (even if the suggested order quantity is less than zero).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Enforce RMA Qty&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;If Station is allowed to issue a RMA for parts they haven't ordered from inbound flights etc. then set to 'No'. If 'Yes', the Station will be allowed to return only that stock qty that they counted in the last stock count.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Receipt Configuration&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;The default expectation is that stations will always receipt-confirm all inbound transactions (station orders, direct purchase orders, station-to-station transfers etc.). If however it is permitted for some transactions to be 'automatically' received (i.e. without user interaction), then this can be configured via this setting.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Should Skylog Consider External Target Quantity Data in Core Functions?&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Specifies whether or not external target quantities, commonly known as FOS + BUS values (supplied to Skylog via uploaded SCA files), will be used by Skylog to affect various Skylog functions. Such functions would include the calculation of the suggested order quantity figure for automatically generated requisitions. The target values will also be used to determine if a material on a submitted inventory count would be flagged as a query or not. If this setting is set as 'No' then Skylog will use the traditional formulas (which won't use target quantity values). If this setting is set as 'Yes', Skylog will consider the target quantities in its calculations.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Station Depot&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;A unique code that identifies the specific station (unique across all airlines).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Station Loading Code&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;An alternate station identifying code which is used by third-party systems to identify a specific station. This code would be used in data files originating from those partner-systems, such as the Service Rules interface EDI. If this interface is used by the operation associated with the station then the uploading and offloading stations identified within the service rules data must correspond to the Station Loading Codes held by Skylog.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Customer Code&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This is an optional property and should be left blank/empty, it serves a special purpose for a handful of specific catering facilities but has no relevance for the majority of stations and thus can be ignored.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Default Loading&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This is a mandatory field that may be used when SkyLog generates a forecast for the airline; it can be set to Yes or No (true or false) and it will be used if there is insufficient pre-set data or rules to determine the loading or unloading station. The SSIM (Flight Schedule) file that we receive and process for the airline only tells us the departure and arrival ports for each flight in the schedule. Some ports will be setup with multiple catering stations at a given port and we will determine which station loads and unloads the content of any provisioning code based on pre-set data in the provisioning rule and/or exchange rules. However if there is insufficient  pre-set data/exchange rules to tell us which station will perform the loading/unloading then the forecast will use the default station which is determined by this field. Importantly, there can only be a SINGLE default catering station per combination of Port &amp;amp; Airline (additionally, in case it’s not obvious, the station must be active for the default loading to be set to Yes).&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;170&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;GL Cost Centre Code&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;444&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;An alternate station identifying code which is used by third-party systems to identify a specific station. This code would be used in data files originating from those partner-systems, such as the Service Rules. GL Cost Centre field links financial data with customer financial systems.  In case a new GL Cost Centre is required to be set up please follow the link for guidance how to [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/?title=Station_CostCentreCategoryIndex'''link''']].&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Supply Source=&lt;br /&gt;
Supply sources define which warehouses will be supplying stations with goods and which modes of transport are used. It is possible for stations to be supplied by multiple warehouses and this could be defined at the item level in Station Item / Par Level tables. Multiple modes of transport could be assigned for each supplying warehouse with different transportation and handling lead times and a priority ranking to determine the preferred mode of transport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Supply Sources button is found in the '''Reference Data/Supply Chain Participants/Stations'''. Select desired station by clicking on [[File:Edit.png]]. At the bottom of the new page will be [[File:SupplySourceButton]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add Warehouse==&lt;br /&gt;
To add a warehouse that will be supplying station:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Select  [[File:PlusPlus.png]]&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Select Warehouse&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Set as active &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SetActiveWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Add Transport Methods==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Under the Warehouse-Station Link, next to set up warehouse select [[File:Expand.png]]   to expand the field as per below and select [[File:PlusPlus.png]]  to add mode of transport from selected warehouse.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddModeOfTransport.png |1200px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Select accordingly&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol style=&amp;quot;list-style-type: lower-alpha;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Method of transport from drop down list. Note that there are more options then seen on the screen, use scrolling down option to see all modes of transport available.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Preparation time – days it takes the warehouse to pick and pack.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Transport duration – days it takes from dispatch until station receipt.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Rank – priority / default option.&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AddModeOfTransportSpec.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Complete table should look like this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CompleteTransprotSetup.png |1200px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Station Count Category=&lt;br /&gt;
Station count categories define which items are counted by the Station and how often they are counted. It also allows you to set the tolerances between expected and actual count quantities (count variances) at which a count line is set to &amp;quot;Query&amp;quot;. The level of automation in the count and approval process and also be set – some counts can be set up as auto accepted after they are submitted, a useful feature for stations like lounges with little turnover. Station Count Category can be found under '''Daily Activities/Inventory Counts/Station Count Categories'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Select [[File:PlusPlus.png]]   in the Station Count Categories page &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Select station requiring new station count category&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectStationRequiringNewStationCountCategory.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:80%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
! Field&lt;br /&gt;
! Sample&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Count Category Description&lt;br /&gt;
|Full&lt;br /&gt;
|Description of the count category. The station could have multiple counts with different parts under each, so naming of the count category is useful to avoid confusions. A typical example might be to set up a count category called &amp;quot;Major Equipment&amp;quot; for all technical equipment such as Trolleys/carts or to have a category &amp;quot;Disposables&amp;quot; for all disposable items. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Count Schedule Option&lt;br /&gt;
|Automatic Schedule&lt;br /&gt;
|There are 3 options &amp;quot;Automatic Schedule&amp;quot; (repeats based on provided frequencies), &amp;quot;Manual Schedule&amp;quot; (follows manual dates listed in manual schedule table on the bottom of the page) and &amp;quot;None&amp;quot; (stock counts generated only manually)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Automatic Schedule Options&lt;br /&gt;
|Specific Day/s of the Week&lt;br /&gt;
|You can pick between days of the week or days of the month, days of the week or days of the month [that new inventory counts will be due]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Specific Day/s of the Week or Month&lt;br /&gt;
| --&lt;br /&gt;
|tick/specify days when stock count should be triggered; if specifying days of the month, each must be comma-separated.  Note: you can not specify consecutive days; there has to be at least one day's gap between inventory counts [it's not allowed to instruct a station to perform a new count each and every day&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Weeks Between Counts&lt;br /&gt;
|1&lt;br /&gt;
|Number of weeks between counts (if 'Automatic Schedule Options' = &amp;quot;Specific Days of the week&amp;quot;, rather than Specific Days of the Month)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Notify Days&lt;br /&gt;
|3&lt;br /&gt;
|Number of days the stock count will be generated before the expected count date, the station will get an email notification at when the count is generated and then has the notify days to prepare for the count.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Next Count Generation Date&lt;br /&gt;
|September 28, 2023&lt;br /&gt;
|Select next/first stock date for a count to be scheduled. This date is automatically updated each time a count is generated but a user can re-sync the schedule by editing the date &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Value Tolerance for Count Variances&lt;br /&gt;
|100&lt;br /&gt;
|Not mandatory, select variances in value per line to tolerate as ok. Meaning if, for example, there is a 100 GBP tolerance and the discrepancy from the expected stock count is 99 GBP, the count will appear as ok. Different tolerance levels can also be set at the item level and the count category tolerance will only apply if there is no item-level tolerance defined.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!% Quantity Tolerance for Count Variances&lt;br /&gt;
|10&lt;br /&gt;
|Not mandatory, select variance in quantity % per line to be tolerated from the expected count. Meaning if, for example, there is a 10% tolerance and the discrepancy from the expected stock count is 5%, it will not appear as a query. Different tolerance levels can also be set at the item level and the count category tolerance will only apply if there is no item-level tolerance defined.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Person Responsible for Counts	&lt;br /&gt;
| --&lt;br /&gt;
|Select the person (out of those assigned to this station/organization site), that will be responsible for counts and will be receiving notifications related to it. Leave this field blank if you would prefer alerts to be sent to ALL points of contact associated with the station. If no point of contact can be found, alerts will be sent to the station provisioning manager (in lieu of being sent to caterer / groundhandlers with links to the station).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Include Floating Qty&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes&lt;br /&gt;
|Float stock represents the stock that is in the inbound, outbound, and production areas of the station often known as &amp;quot;WIP&amp;quot; (Work in Progress), it does not include stock that is in a storeroom/warehouse area of the Station. If selected &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot;, columns will appear on the stock count page to count both Backup stock and Float stock and report both quantities separately. Backup stock is the stock in a storeroom/warehouse area). If selected &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; then only the Backup stock is expected to be counted and reported. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Include Breakages&lt;br /&gt;
|No&lt;br /&gt;
|If yes, will add a column for breakages to be filled by the Station during the stock count. This reflects any losses at the station since the previous count as a result of breaking/damaging products (to an extent they can no longer be used) - e.g. cracked glass, chipped chinaware, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Attach Count Sheet File When Notifying Station&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes&lt;br /&gt;
|Advise selecting Yes, which will attach an excel file to the notification email, that when filled could be uploaded to SkyLog for submission. It is a good tool to avoid manual entries in the portal. Note, for new airlines, additional setup is required to enable this - please raise a support ticket and ask for this option to be enabled though.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Consumption Trend Span (Days)&lt;br /&gt;
|180&lt;br /&gt;
|Default value is 180, and if left blank it will generate a value of 180 days. This value is used in the calculation of the &amp;quot;smooth&amp;quot; average past daily consumption, if set to 180 it will look at the last 180 days when calculating the daily average but it can be set longer or shorter.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Generate Automatic Requisitions Upon Count Approval&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes&lt;br /&gt;
|If Yes, the system will generate an automatic requisition after the stock count is approved (although this is dependent upon the station itself being configured to support automatic requisitioning too).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Include All Items in Automatic Requisitions&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes, will include all active items in any auto requisition (even if the suggested order is 0)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Delay (Hours) For Automatic Requisition Generation&lt;br /&gt;
|0&lt;br /&gt;
|This is the number of hours after count approval before which any automatically triggered requisition should be triggered&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Include All Station Par Levels In Counts&lt;br /&gt;
|No&lt;br /&gt;
|Only select YES for &amp;quot;special&amp;quot; counts which are additional to the regular counting cycle, such as a coordinated global stocktake. Thus for regular counts, this setting should be set as NO. Only count categories where this configuration setting is set as NO will appear as a valid option when defining a default count category (See 'Station Defaults' section below).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Update Station Par Levels&lt;br /&gt;
|Yes&lt;br /&gt;
|Only select NO for &amp;quot;special&amp;quot; counts which are additional to the regular counting cycle, such as a coordinated global stocktake. So for regular counts, this should be set as YES. Only count categories where this configuration setting is set as YES will appear as a valid option when defining a default count category (See 'Station Defaults' section below). When set as YES, assuming that the count is approved, the approved inventory figures will be copied across to the station par levels and will be used as the starting inventory figures for the next iteration of the count. Additionally, with this configuration flag set as YES, it will also mean that average consumption figures are calculated and may have a bearing on RMA functionality too (depending on station-level configuration tho).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
!Count Auto Approval Option&lt;br /&gt;
|Review	Required&lt;br /&gt;
|&lt;br /&gt;
* Review Required - will request that the Station Manager does a full review of every stock count submitted by the Station for this count category, even if there are no lines on the count that are flagged as outside of tolerance&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Auto-Approve When No Queries - stock count will be automatically approved by the system if all count lines are within the defined tolerances (i.e. no queries were generated by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Auto-Approve Regardless - this will mean that even if there are lines on the count that are flagged as being outside of tolerance, the count will automatically approve - the station provisioning manager will not be alerted and will not need to review the count, thus there can be no re-count process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Approval NOT Required - only select this option for &amp;quot;special&amp;quot; counts which are additional to the regular counting cycle, such as a co-ordinated global stocktake&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; You can only select the 'Approval NOT Required' option when the 'Update Station Par Levels' flag is set to 'No'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;IMPORTANT:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; Be warned, this is the final configuration flag when you add or edit a station count category record, if you select this option, you will find that it will toggle (update) the settings for &amp;quot;Include ALL Station Par Levels&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Update Station Par Levels&amp;quot; - so you may find that your resultant count category is not as you had originally specified it because of this final setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want regular (standard) counts to always sail through, skipping the approval step then choose the &amp;quot;Auto-Approve Regardless&amp;quot; option instead; thus, the station provisioning manager won't be notified to review the count when the caterer has submitted their inventory figures.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sample of complete Station Count Category setup==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SampleCategoryCount.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Station Defaults=&lt;br /&gt;
Station defaults are used whenever doing a mass creation of Station Item records, for example - when copying the items from one station to another, or when the forecasting system, as a result of loading or flight schedule changes, creates new items for that station. The criteria in station defaults will be applied to all items copied or created from forecasting but can be edited item by item as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;In the Stations page (Reference data/Supply Chain Participants/Stations) select a station in edit mode. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Fill Station Default table accordingly. Table with descriptions is presented below&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- TODO: Table should be replaced with wikitext formatting rather than HTML --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;0&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Field&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Sample&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Description&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Transport Method/Duration (Days)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Select default method of transport&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Security Stock (Days)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;14&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Security / safety stock of the item to be held at the station in days&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Days Needed for Preparation&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This is the number of days needed to get stock prepared for for a flight.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Days Needed to Recycle&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This is the number of days needed to recycle stock from inbound flights to be ready for re-use e.g. the separation &amp;amp; and washing time&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Specify Order Frequency Type&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Days between delivery/orders or days of the week.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Days Between Delivery/Orders&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This field will only appear if the Order Frequency type is &amp;quot;Days between delivery Orders&amp;quot; and it represents the number of days between regular replenishment orders.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Ordering days of week&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This field will only appear if the Order Frequency type is &amp;quot;Days of week&amp;quot; and it represents the days when the automatic requisitions need to be generated taking into account the planned delivery date and the lead time in the system. For example, if the order needs to be delivered on Tuesdays and Fridays and the total lead time to the station (including preparation time and transit days) is three days, then you should select Sunday (Tuesday's delivery) and Wednesday (Friday's delivery). If the working days for the station are Monday to Friday, then Skylog will generate the requisition on the previous working day. [[File:20200520 Ordering days.png|400px]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;% Loss at the Station&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;This is used by the forecasting system. Any percentage here will be applied and deducted from the calculated recovery of the item at the Station. So if the forecasting system has calculated that a quantity of 200 should be recovered from inbound flights but this field is set to 10% then only 180 will be considered usable to meet future demand.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Count Category&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Full&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Selects a stock count category (set up in previous chapter) to which the item will be added.  &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;PLEASE NOTE&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; that only counts where &amp;quot;Update Par Levels&amp;quot; is set to YES and &amp;quot;Include All Par Levels&amp;quot; is set as NO will appear as a choice on the drop down list.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Round Requisition Quantities?&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Yes&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Yes, means and suggested requisition quantities will be rounded up to multiples of the default unit of issue&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Include Target Floating Stock For Automatic Requisitions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;No&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;How Is Item To Be Requisitioned?&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Events&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Event refers to auto requisitions, Manual to manually raised requisitions&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;217&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;Default Requisition Confirmed Qty to Zero&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;81&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;No&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;267&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Stock Items / Par Levels=&lt;br /&gt;
Station Par levels refers to items a Station would be allowed to place orders for and receive into stock. These can be created in a few ways: copy Par Levels from identical/similar station or do it one item at a time&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Copy Par Level from existing station==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;in Station Par Levels select a stations you want to copy whole par level from&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;At the bottom of the screen press the button &amp;quot;Copy&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LocationOfCopyParLevelsButton.png |1200px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;In field “Use Destination Station Defaults?” mark to “Yes”. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Select station you want to copy par levels to. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CopyParLevelToStationPage.png |1200px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;Confirmation screen will appear. &amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CopyParLevelsConfirmPage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ol&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding Items to Par Levels==&lt;br /&gt;
Station Par levels are available for review and edit under &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Daily Activities&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; in &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Provision section&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. Please select the Station with [[File:Edit.png]]. To add a new item press [[File:PlusPlus.png]] and complete filling in the table to finalize the setting up, make sure that the item status is marked &amp;quot;Active&amp;quot; on the bottom of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Closing Station=&lt;br /&gt;
In order to close an active station, prior to marking the Station as not active, few very important steps need to be taken to make sure the MRP forecast is reflected correctly for material planners, and that all the assets are accounted for, the below steps need to be taken;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Stock In transit is accounted for==&lt;br /&gt;
Any stock that is in transit to the Station needs to be receipted and moved via RMA to another location (another Station or Warehouse), used up at the station, or scrapped with a scrap order. There should be no stock left at the station before the station can be closed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Station Stock Counts are closed==&lt;br /&gt;
All station stock counts need to be closed, and most importantly, the last stock count needs to have all items showing zero - the last stock count qty of each item needs to be 0. This is important to reflect correct consumption and asset valuations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==End of the forecast ==&lt;br /&gt;
Any manual forecast uploaded in SkyLog related to the Station you want to close needs to be removed from SkyLog.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose&amp;diff=2957</id>
		<title>RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=RegistrationHelpWhichRoleShouldIChoose&amp;diff=2957"/>
		<updated>2022-04-08T16:01:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are unsure which Job Role option to choose, here is some helpful advice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are employed by a service-oriented company or work within an airline subsidiary operation, involved in activities such as:&lt;br /&gt;
** catering&lt;br /&gt;
** airport services including ground handling, cleaning, maintenance etc.&lt;br /&gt;
** equipment refurbishment&lt;br /&gt;
** ticketing operations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Consumer (End Customer)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are employed by an airline or a group of airlines and have a head office function, then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Client Head Office Staff&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are involved in warehousing operations or you provide transportation/freight forwarding services then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Provider of Logistics (3PL) services&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you work for a  company that supplies equipment, food &amp;amp; beverages or other products consumed during flights, then please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Supplier/Vendor&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Lastly, if you are an employee of SkyLogistiX either directly or through any of its parent companies, including Kuehne+Nagel or Gate Gourmet (formerly LSG SkyChefs Europe), please select the '&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Control Tower Staff (SkylogistiX/KN)&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;' option.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2954</id>
		<title>StationKPIDetails</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2954"/>
		<updated>2022-04-06T17:05:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Station Item KP Report&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column - Average Consumption &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Average Consumption' column is the Historical Consumption which is derived from the latest station par level 'Trend Average Daily Consumption' figure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Historical Consumption is calculated as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Item par level Trend Avg Daily Consumption * Elapsed Days†) / No. of Counts†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Where:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
† Elapsed days = days between first and last count dates.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
†† No. Of Counts = within that Trend Span 1 of days for that station's item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The station par level &amp;quot;Trend Averaged Daily Consumption&amp;quot; figure is determined when a count is approved; in other words, the par level record is updated from the newly  approved station inventory count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trend Avg Daily Consumption = (First Count Qty† – Current Count Qty + (Total Receipts – Total Returns)) / Days†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Where:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
† First Count Qty = the oldest approved reported inventory figure for counts within the considered trend span period, e.g. the the earliest reported inventory count figure from the last 180 days.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
†† days between first and last count within the trend days&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The Trend span can be set in 3 ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) There is an organisation attribute 'TREND_AVG_DAYS' for the Airline.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) It is set on the station count category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) If its not set in either places detailed above then the trend ppan defaults to 180 days&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Report_GeneralReportsIndex&amp;diff=2953</id>
		<title>Report GeneralReportsIndex</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Report_GeneralReportsIndex&amp;diff=2953"/>
		<updated>2022-04-06T17:04:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[StationKPIDetails]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Report_GeneralReportsIndex&amp;diff=2952</id>
		<title>Report GeneralReportsIndex</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Report_GeneralReportsIndex&amp;diff=2952"/>
		<updated>2022-04-06T17:02:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: Blanked the page&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2951</id>
		<title>StationKPIDetails</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2951"/>
		<updated>2022-04-06T16:58:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Station Item KP Report&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column - Average Consumption &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Average Consumption' column is the Historical Consumption which is derived from the latest station par level 'Trend Average Daily Consumption' figure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Historical Consumption is calculated as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Item par level Trend Avg Daily Consumption * Elapsed Days†) / No. of Counts†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
† Elapsed days = days between first and last count dates.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
†† No. Of Counts = within that Trend Span 1 of days for that station's item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The station par level &amp;quot;Trend Averaged Daily Consumption&amp;quot; figure is determined when a count is approved; in other words, the par level record is updated from the newly  approved station inventory count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trend Avg Daily Consumption = (First Count Qty† – Current Count Qty + (Total Receipts – Total Returns)) / Days†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Where:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
† First Count Qty = the oldest approved reported inventory figure for counts within the considered trend span period, e.g. the the earliest reported inventory count figure from the last 180 days.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
†† days between first and last count within the trend days&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The Trend span can be set in 3 ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) There is an organisation attribute 'TREND_AVG_DAYS' for the Airline.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) It is set on the station count category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) If its not set in either places detailed above then the trend ppan defaults to 180 days&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2950</id>
		<title>StationKPIDetails</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2950"/>
		<updated>2022-04-06T16:57:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Station Item KP Report&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column - Average Consumption &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Average Consumption' column is the Historical Consumption which is derived from the latest station par level 'Trend Average Daily Consumption' figure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Historical Consumption is calculated as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Item par level Trend Avg Daily Consumption x Elapsed Days†) / No. of Counts†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
† Elapsed days = days between first and last count dates.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
†† No. Of Counts = within that Trend Span 1 of days for that station's item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The station par level &amp;quot;Trend Averaged Daily Consumption&amp;quot; figure is determined when a count is approved; in other words, the par level record is updated from the newly  approved station inventory count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trend Avg Daily Consumption = (First Count Qty† – Current Count Qty + (Total Receipts – Total Returns)) / Days†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Where:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
† First Count Qty = the oldest approved reported inventory figure for counts within the considered trend span period, e.g. the the earliest reported inventory count figure from the last 180 days.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
†† days between first and last count within the trend days&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The Trend span can be set in 3 ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) There is an organisation attribute 'TREND_AVG_DAYS' for the Airline.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) It is set on the station count category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) If its not set in either places detailed above then the trend ppan defaults to 180 days&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2949</id>
		<title>StationKPIDetails</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2949"/>
		<updated>2022-04-06T16:56:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Station Item KP Report&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column - Average Consumption &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Average Consumption' column is the Historical Consumption which is derived from the latest station par level 'Trend Average Daily Consumption' figure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Historical Consumption is calculated as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Item par level Trend Avg Daily Consumption x Elapsed Days†) / No. of Counts†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
† Elapsed days = days between first and last count dates.&lt;br /&gt;
†† No. Of Counts = within that Trend Span 1 of days for that station's item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The station par level &amp;quot;Trend Averaged Daily Consumption&amp;quot; figure is determined when a count is approved; in other words, the par level record is updated from the newly  approved station inventory count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trend Avg Daily Consumption = (First Count Qty† – Current Count Qty + (Total Receipts – Total Returns)) / Days†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
† First Count Qty = the oldest approved reported inventory figure for counts within the considered trend span period, e.g. the the earliest reported inventory count figure from the last 180 days.&lt;br /&gt;
†† days between first and last count within the trend days&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The Trend span can be set in 3 ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) There is an organisation attribute 'TREND_AVG_DAYS' for the Airline.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) It is set on the station count category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) If its not set in either places detailed above then the trend ppan defaults to 180 days&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2948</id>
		<title>StationKPIDetails</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2948"/>
		<updated>2022-04-06T16:55:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Station Item KP Report&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column - Average Consumption &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Average Consumption' column is the Historical Consumption which is derived from the latest station par level 'Trend Average Daily Consumption' figure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Historical Consumption is calculated as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Item par level Trend Avg Daily Consumption x Elapsed Days†  )/ No. of Counts†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
† Elapsed days = days between first and last count dates.&lt;br /&gt;
†† No. Of Counts = within that Trend Span 1 of days for that station's item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The station par level &amp;quot;Trend Averaged Daily Consumption&amp;quot; figure is determined when a count is approved; in other words, the par level record is updated from the newly  approved station inventory count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trend Avg Daily Consumption = (First Count Qty† – Current Count Qty + (Total Receipts – Total Returns)) / Days†† &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
† First Count Qty = the oldest approved reported inventory figure for counts within the considered trend span period, e.g. the the earliest reported inventory count figure from the last 180 days.&lt;br /&gt;
†† days between first and last count within the trend days&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The Trend span can be set in 3 ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) There is an organisation attribute 'TREND_AVG_DAYS' for the Airline.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) It is set on the station count category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) If its not set in either places detailed above then the trend ppan defaults to 180 days&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2947</id>
		<title>StationKPIDetails</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2947"/>
		<updated>2022-04-06T16:53:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: Jspicer moved page User:StationKPIDetails to StationKPIDetails without leaving a redirect&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Station Item KP Report&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column - Average Consumption &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Average Consumption' column is the Historical Consumption which is derived from the latest station par level 'Trend Average Daily Consumption' figure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Historical Consumption is calculated as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Item par level Trend Avg Daily Consumption x Elapsed Days*  )/ No. of Counts** &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
* Elapsed days = days between first and last count dates.&lt;br /&gt;
** No. Of Counts = within that Trend Span 1 of days for that station's item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The station par level &amp;quot;Trend Averaged Daily Consumption&amp;quot; figure is determined when a count is approved; in other words, the par level record is updated from the newly  approved station inventory count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trend Avg Daily Consumption = (First Count Qty* – Current Count Qty + (Total Receipts – Total Returns)) / Days** &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
* First Count Qty = the oldest approved reported inventory figure for counts within the considered trend span period, e.g. the the earliest reported inventory count figure from the last 180 days.&lt;br /&gt;
** days between first and last count within the trend days&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The Trend span can be set in 3 ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) There is an organisation attribute 'TREND_AVG_DAYS' for the Airline.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) It is set on the station count category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) If its not set in either places detailed above then the trend ppan defaults to 180 days&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2946</id>
		<title>StationKPIDetails</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationKPIDetails&amp;diff=2946"/>
		<updated>2022-04-06T16:51:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: Created page with &amp;quot;&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Station Item KP Report&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;  Column - Average Consumption   The 'Average Consumption' column is the Historical Consumption which is derived from the latest station par lev...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Station Item KP Report&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Column - Average Consumption &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'Average Consumption' column is the Historical Consumption which is derived from the latest station par level 'Trend Average Daily Consumption' figure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Historical Consumption is calculated as follows: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Item par level Trend Avg Daily Consumption x Elapsed Days*  )/ No. of Counts** &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
* Elapsed days = days between first and last count dates.&lt;br /&gt;
** No. Of Counts = within that Trend Span 1 of days for that station's item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The station par level &amp;quot;Trend Averaged Daily Consumption&amp;quot; figure is determined when a count is approved; in other words, the par level record is updated from the newly  approved station inventory count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Trend Avg Daily Consumption = (First Count Qty* – Current Count Qty + (Total Receipts – Total Returns)) / Days** &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
* First Count Qty = the oldest approved reported inventory figure for counts within the considered trend span period, e.g. the the earliest reported inventory count figure from the last 180 days.&lt;br /&gt;
** days between first and last count within the trend days&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; The Trend span can be set in 3 ways:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) There is an organisation attribute 'TREND_AVG_DAYS' for the Airline.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) It is set on the station count category. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) If its not set in either places detailed above then the trend ppan defaults to 180 days&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationCount_Index&amp;diff=2888</id>
		<title>StationCount Index</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=StationCount_Index&amp;diff=2888"/>
		<updated>2021-12-22T07:21:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt; Please use our [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Tips_and_Tricks '''Tips and Tricks''']] page for understanding how the SkySuite portal works and how to navigate faster and easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Station Inventory Reporting&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airline you represent will require that you enter your locations inventory counts on agreed timelines, this page will walk you through how it is possible to do this via SkyLog. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Station Inventory Reporting Location&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pressing the “Inventory Counts” option from “Daily Activities” -&amp;gt; “Inventory Counts” will display the&lt;br /&gt;
following page;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the above screen I am logged in as someone at the Los Angeles caterer of British Airways so I see all the reports for Los Angeles (LAX) but each station will only see their own reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The counts are listed with the most recent at the top, in the example above the top line show a count at “Pending” status which means it has not taken place yet but is expected to happen on the 7th of November (The expected date). Below this line you see all the previous counts will have all been completed and approved or cancelled in the past.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can view the detail of a report by pressing the Show Icon on the line you want to view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the report is pending you can also edit it and enter/change count figures by pressing the Edit Icon on the line you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;General Tips and Guidelines about Stock Counting&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section is not related to the system but just provides some general tips and guidelines concerning inventory counting in general. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • It is best to count at the end of the operational day, i.e. after all departing flights have left and all arriving flights have been unloaded. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • If required to count floating stock, you need to count everything in the kitchen that also includes stock waiting to be loaded to outbound aircraft and stock unloaded from arriving aircraft that has not yet been processed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • The unit of measure in which quantities should be entered is the stocking unit and this is shown on the count screens (see later). You should be aware that for some items the stocking unit may be a box and others it may be a piece. You will always enter both back up and floating quantity in the same unit (the stocking unit). This means that you are likely to have to convert one or the other. For example, if the stocking unit is a box then counting the backup stock which is usually in boxes will be straight forward but the floating stock will typically be in pieces (opened) so whatever you count will need to be converted to boxes. On the other hand, if the stocking unit is a piece then it will work the other way around and floating stock will be straight forward but when you count boxes in the backup store you will need to convert them to pieces before entering them in the system. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • Pay special attention to any receipts received on the day of the count. If you have such a situation, you should receive the shipment with that day’s date and include it in your count figures. If you do not include the figures in your count, for example if the receipt was late just before the count was finished and there is not time for you to include it, then you must receive it into the system the next day with the next day’s date. If you don’t do this the forecasting system will think that the count included that shipment and miscalculate the suggested order quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Editing an Inventory Count&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As described in the previous section if you have a count at “Pending status” you can enter the count figures by pressing the Edit Icon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_4.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following screen will be displayed;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_5.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this screen you are required to enter the “Actual Count Date” in which the inventory count took place, this is a vital piece of information which will need to be accurate for the planning and forecasting side of Skylog. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your station is setup for uploading the count details via an excel update you will be sent an email with it attached when the count is created but if you misplace it you can download a fresh copy from the same screen as the “Download Blank Count Sheet” button will be presented;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_6.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you click “Save” you will be presented the page to enter the amount of stock you have counted against each item setup for your station;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_7.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the detail section against each line you may see two quantity fields, “Backup” quantity is the amount you have in your store room/ area and “Float” quantity is any inventory you have outside the backup store e.g. on the kitchen floor. You will need to enter a figure against each line so if there is no inventory you should enter a zero. If you only see a backup quantity it means that you are not expected to count the floating stock but if you do see a floating quantity field, then you must count the floating stock. Floating stock means all stock on your facility at the time of the count which includes stock waiting to be loaded to outgoing aircraft and stock that has been received from arriving aircraft but not yet processed. It is most efficient and will help to get accurate and consistent measures of the floating stock if you perform the count at the close of the operational day after all departing aircraft for that day have been loaded and all arriving aircraft have been unloaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The detail section will always display in pages of 10 at a time in the example below we can see there are 338 items in the count and this is shown over 34 pages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_8.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can move backwards and forwards through the pages with the arrow keys. You can also display everything on one screen by changing the drop down for “10” to “All” or select a certain number between 10 and 100 as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the bottom of the page you will see the following buttons;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_9.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Upload Completed Count Sheet''' – If your station is setup to accept population of the count via an excel upload this will be presented to you, please follow the steps when clicked on uploading the completed document.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''View Uploaded File Errors''' – Again only visible for stations that upload counts via excel, this will detail any errors once you have attempted an upload.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Save and Continue''' - Allows you to save what you have entered but will leave you in the screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Save and Exit''' – Saves anything you have entered but will exit the page and return you to the main “Inventory Count” page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Submit''' - Will save your work and mark the count as complete and change the status to “Pending Review” after this you will no longer be able to change any of the figures. The next step is that Skylogistix will review what you have entered and may come back to you to do a recount – see later section in this manual for details of recounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Adding an Item to a Count&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of items shown on the count detail page should include all the items you are expected to have at your location. If, however you have an item that is not showing you can add it with the add item button at the top of the page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_10.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will display the following;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_11.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the “Select Stock Item” button to search and choose the item you want to add. (Use the three dots under “Code” or “Description” to filter for a specific item) then click “Select”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_12.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the item is added you can then fill in the “Float” and “Backup” quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Submitting a Count&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Submitting via the portal&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As mentioned previously to submit a count to Skylogistix for review you simply press the Submit button at the bottom of the page, once you have entered quantities for all items. Until you do this the count is '''NOT''' marked as complete, and doesn’t move to the next stage thus you will continue to get email reminders that your count is overdue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you haven’t entered a figure for every item, you will see the message shown below and the count will not be submitted. You will then need to enter the missing figures and click submit again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_13.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have successfully submitted the count you will be returned to the main page that lists all your counts and you should see that the count is now marked as “Complete”, You will now no longer be able to edit the count and you should receive an email confirming that the count has been submitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After a while the status will also change to “Under Review” and you will receive an email telling you that the count has been submitted successfully, which means SkylogistiX is reviewing the figures you entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Submitting via a count sheet&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If decide to upload a count sheet instead of manually entering quantities you '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;MUST&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' download a copy from the actual count date page, or from the bottom bar of the count, as each excel document is unique to each count thus cannot be used on other counts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will be presented with the below sheet once you open the excel document, this is all the items associated with your station, and each line requires a quantity to be entered;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Stock_Count_Excel_1.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is also two other sheets in the document, 'User' and 'Item Reference'&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Stock_Count_Excel_4.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The 'User' sheet is to enter items not referenced on the main sheet, i.e. items that have been incorrectly sent to your location which you do not use but still need to recorded, simply enter the code and quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Stock_Count_Excel_2.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'Item Reference' sheet is just all the items the airline you are counting for has setup in the SkyLog system for you to locate item codes if required for the 'User' sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the count document is completely filled out you can then upload it into the specific count you downloaded it from, in the 'Inventory Counts' page, click the pencil icon and select 'Upload Completed Count Sheet' where you can then select the document from your PC.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Stock_Count_Excel_5.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once uploaded all quantities will be listed against the items in the SkyLog screen, if they are not then you need to click 'View Uploaded File Errors' button at the bottom the count screen to idenify the issues with the sheet, fix and reupload.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Resubmitting a Recount&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After SkylogistiX have reviewed your count if they have a query/ concern over any of the figures you have submitted you will receive an email advising you of the need to recount certain items. If you get such an email you should go to the main Inventory Reporting page described in the above section 4.1 where you should see a count marked status “Recount”.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Press the Edit icon, and then once that page is displayed set the Query filter to “Yes” to see all the lines that have been queried by SkylogistiX.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_14.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the example below you can see 5 item lines are in Query.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Count_15.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each line if you see what is wrong you can change the figures on the above screen but you will see any comment from SkylogistiX regarding why they queried the count in the “4PL Provider Comment” column. If you want to enter a comment to justify your figure you can enter it in the “Station Comment” column.&lt;br /&gt;
When you have dealt with all the queried lines press “Submit” and the count will be resubmitted to Skylogistix for a further review. Hopefully this time it will be OK but it is possible that some lines are queried again and you will be requested to repeat the process for some or all the lines previously queried.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Station Inventory Counts Which Are Cancelled By the System&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may see that some counts which are in status: &amp;quot;Cancelled By System&amp;quot;; the system will not a station to have two active inventory counts for the same count category at any given time, thus, when a new count is triggered, if there's an existing count which remains open [for the same station and count category] - then the existing (not-yet-completed) count will be cancelled by the system regardless.  So, even if the provisioning manager is mid-way through reviewing a set of re-counted inventory figures or the caterer is mid-way through detailing their inventory figures it will make NO difference - the count will be cancelled, which could lead to frustration on the part of the user (as their time will have been for nothing).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the existing count is cancelled will depend upon a number of things:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) when the next count date is&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) the &amp;quot;notify days&amp;quot; setting, which is typically 3x days but can be 1 to 7x days and is configureble per count category&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) when the scheduler service runs to call the station-count agent&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Scheduler service polls at regular intervals looking for new counts to create, however, it does not run on the stroke of midnight each day; the scheduler is stopped and re-started for maintenance and can be stopped and re-started at any time of the day or night.  This means that there is no fixed/hard time when new counts will be triggered and existing (open) counts will be cancelled - so its not possible to say EXACTLY when an existing count may be subject to cancellation; as such, it is not possible to forewarn users of an impendending deadline.  However, SkyLog sends numerous emails to alert and remind a caterer when they must complete and submit their inventory figures - provided that  these alerts and reminders are acted upon by the caterer in a timely manner, there should be minimal risk of a count ever cancelled mid-way through through taking action on the count.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2886</id>
		<title>SecurityQuestionsResetForm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2886"/>
		<updated>2021-12-16T18:19:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== What to do if a user needs to reset the password for their Skysuite Account but they are unable to answer the security questions held for the account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user is unable to answer the security questions for their account, they can complete a reset form and send it to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The completed form '''MUST''' come from the email address that is linked to the user's account, if it comes from a different email address, we will not act on the request - that may mean that the user needs to register for a new account, in which case so be it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must send the completed form to us using: '''skysuite-support@skylogistix.com'''; if ANYONE else is in distribution, be it a colleague, their line manager or the provisioning manager for their station (even if that's a SkylogistiX employee) we will not act on the request - the user will need to start over and choose new/fresh security questions.  The questions should be personal and private and thus only the end-user should be able to successfully answer the chosen security question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''No one''' else should know what the security questions for an account are, only the owner of the account, hence why if the end-user has cc'd someone else on their email, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is suspected to be a group/shared account, e.g. used by everyone in a location then this is not something that we encourage - in that situation, we will ask each user to register for his/her own SkySuite account, thus the security questions should be personal and meaningful/relevant to the end user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the security questions are impersonal then we may reject the request, for example &amp;quot;What colour is the notice board above Dave's desk?&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Who was most drunk at the 2019 Christmas office party?&amp;quot;, e.g. they could be answered by anyone in the office at that location, we will reject the request.  Similarly, if the questions are poorly chosen and easy to answer by ''ANYONE'', e.g. &amp;quot;What is the answer to 1 + 1?&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;What is the capital city of England?&amp;quot;, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of GOOD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why it's a GOOD Question Choice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite football team? || Barcelona || Simple, one word answer and a question that should last with you for life.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Name of my first ever dog? || Rover || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Surname of my first ever boyfriend/girlfriend? || Thomas || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My father’s first name? || John || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of BAD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why it's a BAD Question Choice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite color? || Blue || Can be easily guessed-at by others.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In what year was I born? || 1980|| Any one that knows you can probably guess your age fairly accurately (it won't take too many attempts to guess it correctly).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is the name of my boyfriend/girlfriend? || Jamie || This may not be a good choice (depending on how frequently your love life changes!) :-)&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My first holiday? || Abergavenny, Wales, Summer of 1994|| Question is not specific enough and answer is too long and uses punctuation which may not be repeated the same way.   To clarify, specifying “Abergavenny, Wales, Summer - 1994” would result in SkyLog rejecting your answer as it needs to be an exact match.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| My first pet? || Gerbil called “Petal” || See previous note&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my surname? || Smith || It's TOO easy for ANYONE to answer &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my password || London2012 || If you can’t remember your password in the first place then you won’t be able to answer your security questions (think about it!)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my credit card PIN? || 1234 || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line, it should be something known only to you and should not be shared / divulged.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my social security number? || AB 00 11 22 C || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line needlessly (unless it is required by a government agency or your employer for example).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:''' &lt;br /&gt;
* There is no need to actually print, complete and scan/photograph the form; you can simply send an email to us with your chosen security questions and questions.  Your choices don't need to be sent as an attachment or embedded file; your choices can be typed as regular text within the body of you message (email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you should need to answer your chosen security questions at some point, you '''MUST''' enter your chosen answer exactly as it's specified - your security questions are '''CASE SENSITIVE'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Every user must have TWO security questions &amp;amp; answer pairings; the user will be prompted to successfully answer BOTH chosen security questions in order to reset the password held for their portal account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remember'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like a bank, we will NEVER ask you to reveal, share the password for your SkySuite Web portal account - if anyone should ever ask you for this, it is very likely to be a fraudulent request from someone who is not trustworthy; you should never disclose, reveal your password nor the answers to your chosen security questions.  This information should not be written down/printed nor should it be stored in files on your computer (nor any other electronic device for that matter).  Furthermore, such sensitive information should not be shared with your colleagues nor your boss / line manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG|Security Questions Reset Form]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2885</id>
		<title>SecurityQuestionsResetForm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2885"/>
		<updated>2021-12-16T13:44:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== What to do if a user needs to reset the password for their Skysuite Account but they are unable to answer the security questions held for the account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user is unable to answer the security questions for their account, they can complete a reset form and send it to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The completed form '''MUST''' come from the email address that is linked to the user's account, if it comes from a different email address, we will not act on the request - that may mean that the user needs to register for a new account, in which case so be it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must send the completed form to us using: '''skysuite-support@skylogistix.com'''; if ANYONE else is in distribution, be it a colleague, their line manager or the provisioning manager for their station (even if thats a SkylogistiX employee) we will not act on the request - the user will need to start over and choose new/fresh security questions.  The questions should be personal and private and thus only the end-user should be able to successfully answer the chosen security question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''No one''' else should know what the security questions for an account are, only the owner of the account, hence why if the end-user has cc'd someone else on their email, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is suspected to be a group/shared account, e.g. used by everyone in a location then this is not something that we encourage - in that situation, we will ask each user to register for his/her own SkySuite account, thus the security questions should be personal and meaningful/relevant to the end user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the security questions are impersonal then we may reject the request, for example &amp;quot;What colour is the notice board above Dave's desk?&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Who was most drunk at the 2019 Christmas office party?&amp;quot;, e.g. they could be answered by anyone in the office at that location, we will reject the request.  Similarly, if the questions are poorly chosen and easy to answer by ''ANYONE'', e.g. &amp;quot;What is the answer to 1 + 1?&amp;quot; or  &amp;quot;What is the capital city of England?&amp;quot;, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of GOOD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a GOOD Question Choice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite football team? || Barcelona || Simple, one word answer and a question that should last with you for life.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Name of my first ever dog? || Rover || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Surname of my first ever boyfriend/girlfriend? || Thomas || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My father’s first name? || John || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of BAD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a BAD Question CHoice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite color? || Blue || Can be easily guessed-at by others.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In what year was I born? || 1980|| Anyone that knows you can probably guess your age fairly accurately (it wont take too mamy attempts to guess it correctly).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is the name of my boyfriend/girlfriend? || Jamie || This may not be a good choice (depending on how frequently your love life changes!) :-)&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My first holiday? || Abergavenny, Wales, Summer of 1994|| Question is not specific enough and answer is too long and uses punctuation which may not be repeated the same way.   To clarify, specifying “Abergavenny, Wales, Summer - 1994” would result in SkyLog rejecting your answer as it needs to be an exact match.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| My first pet? || Gerbil called “Petal” || See previous note&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my surname? || Smith || Too easy for ANYONE to answer &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my password || London2012 || If you can’t remember your password in the first place then you won’t be able to answer your security questions (think about it!)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my credit  card PIN? || 1234 || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line, it should be something known only to you and should not be shared / divulged.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my social security number? || AB 00 11 22 C || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line needlessly (unless it is required by a government agency or your employer for example).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:''' &lt;br /&gt;
* There is no need to actually print, complete and scan/photograph the form; you can simply send an email to us with your chosen security questions and questions.  Your choices don't need to sent as an attachment or embedded file; your choices can be typed as regular text within the body of you message (email).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you should need to answer your chosen security questions at some point, you '''MUST''' enter your chosen answer exactly as its specified - your security questions are '''CASE SENSITIVE'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remember'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like a bank, we will NEVER ask you to reveal, share the password for your SkySuite Web portal account - if anyone should ever ask you for this, it is very likely to be a fraudulent request from someone who is not trustworthy; you should never disclose, reveal your password nor the answers to your chosen security questions.  This information should not be written down/printed nor should it be stored in files on your computer nor any other electronic device.  Furthermore, such sensitie information should not be shared with your collegues nor your boss / line manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG|Security Questions Reset Form]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2884</id>
		<title>SecurityQuestionsResetForm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2884"/>
		<updated>2021-12-16T13:43:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== What to do if a user needs to reset the password for their Skysuite Account but they are unable to answer the security questions held for the account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user is unable to answer the security questions for their account, they can complete a reset form and send it to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The completed form '''MUST''' come from the email address that is linked to the user's account, if it comes from a different email address, we will not act on the request - that may mean that the user needs to register for a new account, in which case so be it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must send the completed form to us using: '''skysuite-support@skylogistix.com'''; if ANYONE else is in distribution, be it a colleague, their line manager or the provisioning manager for their station (even if thats a SkylogistiX employee) we will not act on the request - the user will need to start over and choose new/fresh security questions.  The questions should be personal and private and thus only the end-user should be able to successfully answer the chosen security question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''No one''' else should know what the security questions for an account are, only the owner of the account, hence why if the end-user has cc'd someone else on their email, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is suspected to be a group/shared account, e.g. used by everyone in a location then this is not something that we encourage - in that situation, we will ask each user to register for his/her own SkySuite account, thus the security questions should be personal and meaningful/relevant to the end user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the security questions are impersonal then we may reject the request, for example &amp;quot;What colour is the notice board above Dave's desk?&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Who was most drunk at the 2019 Christmas office party?&amp;quot;, e.g. they could be answered by anyone in the office at that location, we will reject the request.  Similarly, if the questions are poorly chosen and easy to answer by ''ANYONE'', e.g. &amp;quot;What is the answer to 1 + 1?&amp;quot; or  &amp;quot;What is the capital city of England?&amp;quot;, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of GOOD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a GOOD Question Choice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite football team? || Barcelona || Simple, one word answer and a question that should last with you for life.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Name of my first ever dog? || Rover || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Surname of my first ever boyfriend/girlfriend? || Thomas || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My father’s first name? || John || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of BAD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a BAD Question CHoice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite color? || Blue || Can be easily guessed-at by others.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In what year was I born? || 1980|| Anyone that knows you can probably guess your age fairly accurately (it wont take too mamy attempts to guess it correctly).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is the name of my boyfriend/girlfriend? || Jamie || This may not be a good choice (depending on how frequently your love life changes!) :-)&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My first holiday? || Abergavenny, Wales, Summer of 1994|| Question is not specific enough and answer is too long and uses punctuation which may not be repeated the same way.   To clarify, specifying “Abergavenny, Wales, Summer - 1994” would result in SkyLog rejecting your answer as it needs to be an exact match.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| My first pet? || Gerbil called “Petal” || See previous note&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my surname? || Smith || Too easy for ANYONE to answer &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my password || London2012 || If you can’t remember your password in the first place then you won’t be able to answer your security questions (think about it!)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my credit  card PIN? || 1234 || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line, it should be something known only to you and should not be shared / divulged.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my social security number? || AB 00 11 22 C || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line needlessly (unless it is required by a government agency or your employer for example).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:''' &lt;br /&gt;
* There is no need to actually print, complete and scan/photograph the form; you can simply send an email to us with your chosen security questions and questions; you choices dont need to sent as an attachment or embedded file, your choices can be edited as text within the body of you message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you should need to answer your chosen security questions at some point, you '''MUST''' enter your chosen answer exactly as its specified - your security questions are '''CASE SENSITIVE'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remember'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like a bank, we will NEVER ask you to reveal, share the password for your SkySuite Web portal account - if anyone should ever ask you for this, it is very likely to be a fraudulent request from someone who is not trustworthy; you should never disclose, reveal your password nor the answers to your chosen security questions.  This information should not be written down/printed nor should it be stored in files on your computer nor any other electronic device.  Furthermore, such sensitie information should not be shared with your collegues nor your boss / line manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG|Security Questions Reset Form]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2883</id>
		<title>SecurityQuestionsResetForm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2883"/>
		<updated>2021-12-16T13:42:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== What to do if a user needs to reset the password for their Skysuite Account but they are unable to answer the security questions held for the account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user is unable to answer the security questions for their account, they can complete a reset form and send it to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The completed form '''MUST''' come from the email address that is linked to the user's account, if it comes from a different email address, we will not act on the request - that may mean that the user needs to register for a new account, in which case so be it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must send the completed form to us using: '''skysuite-support@skylogistix.com'''; if ANYONE else is in distribution, be it a colleague, their line manager or the provisioning manager for their station (even if thats a SkylogistiX employee) we will not act on the request - the user will need to start over and choose new/fresh security questions.  The questions should be personal and private and thus only the end-user should be able to successfully answer the chosen security question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''No one''' else should know what the security questions for an account are, only the owner of the account, hence why if the end-user has cc'd someone else on their email, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is suspected to be a group/shared account, e.g. used by everyone in a location then this is not something that we encourage - in that situation, we will ask each user to register for his/her own SkySuite account, thus the security questions should be personal and meaningful/relevant to the end user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the security questions are impersonal then we may reject the request, for example &amp;quot;What colour is the notice board above Dave's desk?&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Who was most drunk at the 2019 Christmas office party?&amp;quot;, e.g. they could be answered by anyone in the office at that location, we will reject the request.  Similarly, if the questions are poorly chosen and easy to answer by ''ANYONE'', e.g. &amp;quot;What is the answer to 1 + 1?&amp;quot; or  &amp;quot;What is the capital city of England?&amp;quot;, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of GOOD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a GOOD Question Choice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite football team? || Barcelona || Simple, one word answer and a question that should last with you for life.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Name of my first ever dog? || Rover || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Surname of my first ever boyfriend/girlfriend? || Thomas || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My father’s first name? || John || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of BAD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a BAD Question CHoice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite color? || Blue || Can be easily guessed-at by others.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In what year was I born? || 1980|| Anyone that knows you can probably guess your age fairly accurately (it wont take too mamy attempts to guess it correctly).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is the name of my boyfriend/girlfriend? || Jamie || This may not be a good choice (depending on how frequently your love life changes!) :-)&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My first holiday? || Abergavenny, Wales, Summer of 1994|| Question is not specific enough and answer is too long and uses punctuation which may not be repeated the same way.   To clarify, specifying “Abergavenny, Wales, Summer - 1994” would result in SkyLog rejecting your answer as it needs to be an exact match.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| My first pet? || Gerbil called “Petal” || See previous note&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my surname? || Smith || Too easy for ANYONE to answer &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my password || London2012 || If you can’t remember your password in the first place then you won’t be able to answer your security questions (think about it)&lt;br /&gt;
!-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my credit  card PIN? || 1234 || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line, it should be something known only to you and should not be shared / divulged.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my social security number? || AB 00 11 22 C || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line needlessly (unless it is required by a government agency or your employer for example).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:''' &lt;br /&gt;
* There is no need to actually print, complete and scan/photograph the form; you can simply send an email to us with your chosen security questions and questions; you choices dont need to sent as an attachment or embedded file, your choices can be edited as text within the body of you message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you should need to answer your chosen security questions at some point, you '''MUST''' enter your chosen answer exactly as its specified - your security questions are '''CASE SENSITIVE'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remember'''&lt;br /&gt;
Like a bank, we will NEVER ask you to reveal, share the password for your SkySuite Web portal account - if anyone should ever ask you for this, it is very likely to be a fraudulent request from someone who is not trustworthy; you should never disclose, reveal your password nor the answers to your chosen security questions.  This information should not be written down/printed nor should it be stored in files on your computer nor any other electronic device.  Furthermore, such sensitie information should not be shared with your collegues nor your boss / line manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG|Security Questions Reset Form]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2882</id>
		<title>SecurityQuestionsResetForm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2882"/>
		<updated>2021-12-16T13:39:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== What to do if a user needs to reset the password for their Skysuite Account but they are unable to answer the security questions held for the account ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user is unable to answer the security questions for their account, they can complete a reset form and send it to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The completed form '''MUST''' come from the email address that is linked to the user's account, if it comes from a different email address, we will not act on the request - that may mean that the user needs to register for a new account, in which case so be it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must send the completed form to us using: '''skysuite-support@skylogistix.com'''; if ANYONE else is in distribution, be it a colleague, their line manager or the provisioning manager for their station (even if thats a SkylogistiX employee) we will not act on the request - the user will need to start over and choose new/fresh security questions.  The questions should be personal and private and thus only the end-user should be able to successfully answer the chosen security question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''No one''' else should know what the security questions for an account are, only the owner of the account, hence why if the end-user has cc'd someone else on their email, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is suspected to be a group/shared account, e.g. used by everyone in a location then this is not something that we encourage - in that situation, we will ask each user to register for his/her own SkySuite account, thus the security questions should be personal and meaningful/relevant to the end user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the security questions are impersonal then we may reject the request, for example &amp;quot;What colour is the notice board above Dave's desk?&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Who was most drunk at the 2019 Christmas office party?&amp;quot;, e.g. they could be answered by anyone in the office at that location, we will reject the request.  Similarly, if the questions are just plain stupid and easy to answer by ''ANYONE'', e.g. &amp;quot;What is the answer to 1 + 1?&amp;quot; or  &amp;quot;What is the capital city of England?&amp;quot;, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of GOOD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a GOOD Question Choice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite football team? || Barcelona || Simple, one word answer and a question that should last with you for life.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Name of my first ever dog? || Rover || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Surname of my first ever boyfriend/girlfriend? || Thomas || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My father’s first name? || John || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of BAD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a BAD Question CHoice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite color? || Blue || Can be easily guessed-at by others.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In what year was I born? || 1980|| Anyone that knows you can probably guess your age fairly accurately (it wont take too mamy attempts to guess it correctly).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is the name of my boyfriend/girlfriend? || Jamie || This may not be a good choice (depending on how frequently your love life changes!) :-)&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My first holiday? || Abergavenny, Wales, Summer of 1994|| Question is not specific enough and answer is too long and uses punctuation which may not be repeated the same way.   To clarify, specifying “Abergavenny, Wales, Summer - 1994” would result in SkyLog rejecting your answer as it needs to be an exact match.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| My first pet? || Gerbil called “Petal” || See previous note&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my surname? || Smith || Too easy for ANYONE to answer &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my password || London2012 || If you can’t remember your password in the first place then you won’t be able to answer your security questions (think about it)&lt;br /&gt;
!-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my credit  card PIN? || 1234 || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line, it should be something known only to you and should not be shared / divulged.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my social security number? || AB 00 11 22 C || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line needlessly (unless it is required by a government agency or your employer for example).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE:''' There is no need to actually print, complete and scan/photograph the form; you can simply send an email to us with your chosen security questions and questions; you choices dont need to sent as an attachment or embedded file, your choices can be edited as text within the body of you message.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Remember'''&lt;br /&gt;
Like a bank, we will NEVER ask you to reveal, share the password for your SkySuite Web portal account - if anyone should ever ask you for this, it is very likely to be a fraudulent request from someone who is not trustworthy; you should never disclose, reveal your password nor the answers to your chosen security questions.  This information should not be written down/printed nor should it be stored in files on your computer nor any other electronic device.  Furthermore, such sensitie information should not be shared with your collegues nor your boss / line manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG|Security Questions Reset Form]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2881</id>
		<title>SecurityQuestionsResetForm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2881"/>
		<updated>2021-12-16T13:33:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== What to do if a user needs to reset the password for their Skysuite Account but they are unable to answer the security questions held for the account ==&lt;br /&gt;
== Heading text ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user is unable to answer the security questions for their account, they can complete a reset form and send it to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The completed form '''MUST''' come from the email address that is linked to the user's account, if it comes from a different email address, we will not act on the request - that may mean that the user needs to register for a new account, in which case so be it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must send the completed form to us using: '''skysuite-support@skylogistix.com'''; if ANYONE else is in distribution, be it a colleague, their line manager or the provisioning manager for their station (even if thats a SkylogistiX employee) we will not act on the request - the user will need to start over and choose new/fresh security questions.  The questions should be personal and private and thus only the end-user should be able to successfully answer the chosen security question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''No one''' else should know what the security questions for an account are, only the owner of the account, hence why if the end-user has cc'd someone else on their email, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is suspected to be a group/shared account, e.g. used by everyone in a location then this is not something that we encourage - in that situation, we will ask each user to register for his/her own SkySuite account, thus the security questions should be personal and meaningful/relevant to the end user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the security questions are impersonal then we may reject the request, for example &amp;quot;What colour is the notice board above Dave's desk?&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Who was most drunk at the 2019 Christmas office party?&amp;quot;, e.g. they could be answered by anyone in the office at that location, we will reject the request.  Similarly, if the questions are just plain stupid and easy to answer by ''ANYONE'', e.g. &amp;quot;What is the answer to 1 + 1?&amp;quot; or  &amp;quot;What is the capital city of England?&amp;quot;, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of GOOD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a GOOD Question Choice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite football team? || Barcelona || Simple, one word answer and a question that should last with you for life.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Name of my first ever dog? || Rover || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Surname of my first ever boyfriend/girlfriend? || Thomas || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My father’s first name? || John || Specific question with a single word answer that won't change over time.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examples of BAD Security Questions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Example Question !! Example Answer || Why its a BAD Question CHoice&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my favorite color? || Blue || Can be easily guessed-at by others.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| In what year was I born? || 1980|| Anyone that knows you can probably guess your age fairly accurately (it wont take too mamy attempts to guess it correctly).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is the name of my boyfriend/girlfriend? || Jamie || This may not be a good choice (depending on how frequently your love life changes!) :-)&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| My first holiday? || Abergavenny, Wales, Summer of 1994|| Question is not specific enough and answer is too long and uses punctuation which may not be repeated the same way.   To clarify, specifying “Abergavenny, Wales, Summer - 1994” would result in SkyLog rejecting your answer as it needs to be an exact match.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| My first pet? || Gerbil called “Petal” || See previous note&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my surname? || Smith || Too easy for ANYONE to answer &lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my password || London2012 || If you can’t remember your password in the first place then you won’t be able to answer your security questions!&lt;br /&gt;
!-&lt;br /&gt;
| What is my credit  card PIN? || 1234 || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line, it should be something known only to you and should not be shared / divulged.&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
| What is my social security number? || AB 00 11 22 C || Such information shouldn’t be posted on-line needlessly (unless it is required by a government agency or your employer for example).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG|Security Questions Reset Form]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2880</id>
		<title>SecurityQuestionsResetForm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2880"/>
		<updated>2021-12-16T12:56:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''What to do if a user needs to reset the password for their Skysuite Account but they are unable to answer the security questions held for the account'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user is unable to answer the security questions for their account, they can complete a reset form and send it to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The completed form '''MUST''' come from the email address that is linked to the user's account, if it comes from a different email address, we will not act on the request - that may mean that the user needs to register for a new account, in which case so be it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must send the completed form to us using: '''skysuite-support@skylogistix.com'''; if ANYONE else is in distribution, be it a colleague, their line manager or the provisioning manager for their station (even if thats a SkylogistiX employee) we will not act on the request - the user will need to start over and choose new/fresh security questions.  The questions should be personal and private and thus only the end-user should be able to successfully answer the chosen security question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''No one''' else should know what the security questions for an account are, only the owner of the account, hence why if the end-user has cc'd someone else on their email, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is suspected to be a group/shared account, e.g. used by everyone in a location then this is not something that we encourage - in that situation, we will ask each user to register for his/her own SkySuite account, thus the security questions should be personal and meaningful/relevant to the end user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the security questions are impersonal then we may reject the request, for example &amp;quot;What colour is the notice board above Dave's desk?&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Who was most drunk at the 2019 Christmas office party?&amp;quot;, e.g. they could be answered by anyone in the office at that location, we will reject the request.  Similarly, if the questions are just plain stupid and easy to answer by ''ANYONE'', e.g. &amp;quot;What is the answer to 1 + 1?&amp;quot; or  &amp;quot;What is the capital city of England?&amp;quot;, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See form for some examples of good (and bad) security question choices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG|Security Questions Reset Form]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2879</id>
		<title>SecurityQuestionsResetForm</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=SecurityQuestionsResetForm&amp;diff=2879"/>
		<updated>2021-12-16T12:53:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: Created page with &amp;quot;'''What to do if a user needs to reset the password for their Skysuite Account but they are unable to answer the security questions held for the account'''  If a user is unabl...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''What to do if a user needs to reset the password for their Skysuite Account but they are unable to answer the security questions held for the account'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a user is unable to answer the security questions for their account, they can complete a reset form and send it to us.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The completed form '''MUST''' come from the email address that is linked to the user's account, if it comes from a different email address, we will not act on the request - that may mean that the user needs to register for a new account, in which case so be it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must send the completed form to us using: '''skysuite-support@skylogistix.com'''; if ANYONE else is in distribution, be it a colleague, their line manager or the provisioning manager for their station (even if thats a SkylogistiX employee) we will not act on the request - the user will need to start over and choose new/fresh security questions.  The questions should be personal and private and thus only the end-user should be able to successfully answer the chosen security question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''No one''' else should know what the security questions for an account are, only the owner of the account, hence why if the end-user has cc'd someone else on their email, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is suspected to be a group/shared account, e.g. used by everyone in a location then this is not something that we encourage - in that situation, we will ask each user to register for his/her own SkySuite account, thus the security questions should be personal and meaningful/relevant to the end user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the security questions are impersonal then we may reject the request, for example &amp;quot;What colour is the notice board above Dave's desk?&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Who was most drunk at the 2019 Christmas office party?&amp;quot;, e.g. they could be answered by anyone in the office at that location, we will reject the request.  Similarly, if the questions are just plain stupid and easy to answer by ''ANYONE'', e.g. &amp;quot;What is the answer to 1 + 1?&amp;quot; or  &amp;quot;What is the capital city of England?&amp;quot;, we will reject the request.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See form for some examples of good (and bad) security question choices.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG&amp;diff=2878</id>
		<title>File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:SecurityQuestionResetForm.JPG&amp;diff=2878"/>
		<updated>2021-12-16T12:36:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: Users should complete this form if they need to reset the password against their account but are unable to remember the answers to their security question.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Users should complete this form if they need to reset the password against their account but are unable to remember the answers to their security question.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=MRP_EditAlert&amp;diff=2870</id>
		<title>MRP EditAlert</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=MRP_EditAlert&amp;diff=2870"/>
		<updated>2021-12-01T16:53:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please use our [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Tips_and_Tricks '''Tips and Tricks''']] page for understanding how the SkySuite portal works and how to navigate faster and easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Edit MRP Alert&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this page you will be able to review, confirm and amend the suggested actions for an item - warehouse combination. You will also be able to review and confirm planned forecasted orders suggested by Skylog. From this page you will also have access to the supply parameters which are being used in the calculations. The page is divided in three sections [[#Header Information|''''Header Information'''']], [[#User Confirmed Action|''''User Confirmed Action'''']] and [[#MRP daily figures|''''MRP daily figures'''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Header information&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200522 Edit MRP Alert.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this section, you can see the following information:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Airline''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Batch ID'''- Unique identifier of the MRP batch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Date Created''' - Displays the date when the batch id was created, and therefore all the data used for the calculation of suggested actions and planned PO's is a picture taken on the day the MRP batch was created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Warehouse'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Item code'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Item description'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Item status''' - This is the status at the stock item level. The MRP batch includes current and phased out items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Item Created Date''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Forecast Source (MRP Parameter level)''' - It is defined at the warehouse level, as explained in [[MRP_SettingsIndex|MRP Settings]]. There are three options depending on the airline set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • Auto-Calculated demand forecast based on historical transactions - As per the name this option uses historic transactions to calculate how much stock is required for the future.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 • LogistiX Flight Schedule Network Analysis - The state of the art forecast algorithm developed by SkyLogistiX which takes your airlines flight schedule, passenger numbers, bill of material data and other complex data to accurately predict how much stock is required for the future.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 • Third Party forecast loaded and editable by user via the portal - A manually crafted forecast can be created in Excel or any other 3rd party system capable to produce CSV file and then that file is uploaded into SkyLog for the item to forward plan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Forecast Source (MRP Parameter level)''' -  It is defined at the item warehouse level, as explained in [[ItemWarehouse_Index|Item warehouses]] or [[StockItem_Index#Item_Warehouses|Stock items]]. If this field is blank it will take the forecast source defined at the MRP Parameter Level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Back order quantity''' -  Back orders are created when there is insufficient stock available to fulfil the Order (otherwise known as an Issue), the order will be placed on ‘back order’.  This means that the Order will have a provisional status and is managed in [[Issue_BackOrdersRegular|Manage Back Orders]]. The value displayed is the sum of the the quantity of all the shipments in provisional status for the relevant warehouse, and will be deducted from the inventory to determine the opening stock balance. Therefore it is important to validate whether the stock on Back orders is actually required to reduce the risk of over ordering.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Inventory Qty''' - It is the physical stock level of the item at the warehouse at the moment when the MRP batch run. This value is not live but a picture in time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Expected Qty''' - It is the sum of the stock expected to be delivered into the warehouse by suppliers (Purchase Orders), Stations (RMA's) or other warehouses (Inter Warehouse transfers)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Provisional PO Qty''' - It is the sum of the Purchase Orders in provisional and pending user input status. Please note PO's in this status do not impact the calculation of Closing stock balance, and therefore it is important to review and clear them. You can see the detail of PO's included in this calculation on [[#Provisional PO's|Provisional Purchase Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Unapproved PO Qty''' -  It is the sum of the Purchase Orders in awaiting approval, awaiting supplier commitment and partial supplier commitment statuses. These quantities impact on the calculation of the closing inventory count and therefore on the suggestion of future Purchase Orders. It is important to review and action these Purchase Orders to avoid gaps in supply. You can see the detail of PO's included in this calculation on [[#Unapproved PO's|Un-approved Purchase Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Suggested Action''' - SkyLog provides an explanation of the suggested action in this section [[#Suggested Quantity explanation|User Confirmed Action]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Quantity suggested''' - SkyLog provides detail of the suggested order quantity in the section [[#Suggested Quantity explanation|User Confirmed Action]]. It will always be rounded up to the EOQ (Economic Order Quantity).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Suggested delivery date''' - SkyLog provides an a suggested delivery date in the section [[#Suggested Quantity explanation|User Confirmed Action]]. The earliest possible date will be the day when the MRP was generates + Item supplier lead time. If at that date there is still sufficient inventory the system will look forward to the first date on which the inventory level falls to equal or below the safety stock level and the suggested delivery will be that date. In other words the system tries to ensure that each new delivery is just arriving as the safety stock level is reached&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Action taken''' - Show what action is taken usually thus will match the suggested action but it can be different if the planner reviewing the MRP suggestions decides a different action is more appropriate&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Closed''' - A line is only closed when the sub-batch is successfully processed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes a warning is displayed at the end of this section, when the forecast for the item is only available for a shorter period, compared to the [[#Planning timeline|Planning timeline]], which could lead to under forecasting the item, which is a risk of future gaps in supply. It is important to review the validity of the forecast being used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200522 Warning.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;User Confirmed Action&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create PO or reschedule/Create PO&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200522 User confirmed action PO.png|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will be pre-populated with the suggested action, quantity and required date. The material controller can amend the three fields, but SkyLog will enforce the quantity to be a multiple of the EOQ as defined at the item warehouse supplier level. If the stock is expected to go below safety stock (there is a problem) within the [[#Planning timeline|planning timeline]] and there is an existing PO, but the quantity on this PO is not sufficient to cover all the days when the item will be under safety stock, then Skylog will suggest as an action: reschedule/Create PO.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create PO - Not only did a problem occur within the MRP period, but the period ended with a problem also. Therefore, it is suggested that in order to meet demand a new Purchase Order is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Regarding the date, SkyLog will enforce the Supplier transport time plus the Manufacturing lead time, as set up at the item supplier warehouse level for PO's, therefore, if you want to raise a PO before the lead time allows, it needs to be done by raising a Manual PO or amend the date when the PO is in status pending user input. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once this action is saved and the MRP submitted, SkyLog will create a PO or multiple PO's in Pending user input, that the Material planner will need to validate and submit. SkyLog's MRP will not re-schedule the order for you, to do this, you need to go in to the Purchase Order pages. There you will be to review and edit the expected date (after confirming that the supplier can meet those revised dates).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create IWT or reschedule/Create IWT&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200522 User confirmed action IWT.png|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will be pre-populated with the suggested action, quantity and required date, it will also display the Current free stock, which is the available stock at the origin warehouse. If the stock is expected to go below safety stock (there is a problem) and there is an existing IWT, but the quantity on this PO is not sufficient to cover all the days when the item will be under safety stock within the [[#Planning timeline|planning timeline]], then Skylog will suggest as an action: reschedule/Create IWT. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The material controller can amend the action, quantity and date, but Skylog will enforce the quantity to be a multiple of the EOQ at the item warehouse level. Once this action is saved and the MRP submitted, Skylog will generate IWT split by loading groups in the [[StockItem_Index|Stock Item]] page. It is possible that when the MRP is submitted the stock at the origin warehouse is lower than confirmed in the action, and therefore Skylog will create an IWT back order, that need to be reviewed by the planners, otherwise, it will have an impact to the initial opening stock at the origin warehouse. SkyLog's MRP will not re-schedule Inter Warehouse transfers for you, to do this, you need to go in to the Inter-Warehouse Transfer pages. There you will be to review and edit the expected date (after confirming that the freight forwarder / warehouse can meet those revised dates). Otherwise, an emergency shipment may need to be arranged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;No Action&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;No Action&amp;quot; is suggested if during the [[#Planning timeline|planning timeline]]the item is not estimated to go below safety stock (there are no problems).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200522 User confirmed action No action.png|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Reschedule only&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MRP has identified that you have enough purchase orders or warehouse transfer in place; so it is not recommending that you place additional ones. However, the ones already in place will not arrive in time to prevent you from going below the minimum stock level (otherwise known as the security level).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SkyLog's MRP will not re-schedule the order or transfers for you, to do this, you need to go in to the Purchase Order and/or Inter-Warehouse Transfer pages. There you will be to review and edit the expected date (after confirming that the supplier can meet those revised dates).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that SkyLog supports many different business/system constructions and if the construction for your operation includes another system that is maintaining PO data (such as the airlines system) you should be sure which system is the master system before amending any expected/required dates in SkyLog. The amendment should always be to the master system and that should in turn update the other system(s) via EDI interfaces. If you are not sure please consult your manager/system administrator.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Planning timeline&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The planning timeline is calculated as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • the current date&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 • plus lead time &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • plus order frequency&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • plus review time &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the diagram below it is Period 1 + Period 2:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MRP Planning timeline.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Commands&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Commands user confirmed action MRP.png|600]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;User Confirmed Action&amp;quot; section has the following commands that apply to this section. Please note if you make changes to the planned / forecasted orders, you need to use the commands at the bottom of the page. If you use the commands at the bottom of the page, they will not confirm the MRP actions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Save and continue''': It will confirm the action, quantity and date, and will remain on the same page. This option can be useful if you want to validate forecasted POs after confirming the action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Save and Exit''': It will confirm the action, quantity and date, and will take you to the [[MRP EditMRPBatchAlerts|MRP Batch Alerts]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Save and Previous''': It will It will confirm the action, quantity and date,and will take you to the previous item according to the filters applied in [[MRP EditMRPBatchAlerts|MRP Batch Alerts]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Save and Next''': It will It will confirm the action, quantity and date,and will take you to the previous item according to the filters applied in [[MRP EditMRPBatchAlerts|MRP Batch Alerts]] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Help''': It provides a description of the suggested action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Query''': It provides a detailed explanation regarding to the calculation of the [[#Suggested Quantity explanation| quantity suggested]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Suggested Quantity explanation&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Commands user confirmed action MRP query.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It can be accessed by clicking &amp;quot;Query&amp;quot;. It provides details on which parameters are being taken into account to calculate the quantity and the [[#Planning timeline|planning timeline]], like lead time, security stock in days, period between orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Suggested Qty Explanation.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;MRP detail&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt; MRP daily figures&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is a dynamic table that contains the record for each day betewen the start date and the end of the [[#Planning timeline|planning timeline]] plus the forecasting period which is set up at the item supplier warehouse level. The values with blue font colour have links to provide additional detail of where values come from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Date''': Date which results have been calculated against.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Start Quantity''': Expected Starting Qty for inventory on specified date. This value will be the closing stock from the previous day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''POs not yet approved''': It is the sum of  Purchase Orders in awaiting approval, awaiting supplier commitment and partial supplier commitment statuses on specified date. This quantities impact on the calculation of the closing inventory count and therefore on the suggested of future Purchase Orders. It is important to review and action those Purchase Orders to avoid gaps in supply. When clicking on the quantity, the detail of which POs are included is displayed including links to view the POs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 POs not yet approved wiki.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Expected receipts''': It is the sum of the stock expected to be delivered to the warehouse by suppliers (Purchase Orders), Stations (RMAs) or other warehouses (Inter Warehouse transfers) on specified date. When clicking on the quantity, the detail of the transactions included is displayed including links to view them split in the type of transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Expected receipts.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Planned issues''': It is the sum of any outbound Station Orders expected to ship on the specified date. When clicking on the quantity, the detail of the shipments / issues is displayed including links to view the requisition of the shipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Planned issues.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Planned transfers''': It is the sum of any outbound Inter warehouse transfers expected to ship on the specified date. When clicking on the quantity, the detail of the transfers is displayed including links to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Planned transfers.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Forecasted demand''': It is derived from the [[NetworkAnalysis_WarehouseDemandIndex|warehouse Demand] records, minus already planned issues and transfers. When clicking on the quantity, the detail of the forecasted demand per station will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Forecasted demand.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Closing Inventory''': It is calculated by adding up the Starting inventory, the POs not yet approved and the Expected receipts minus the planned issues, planned transfers and Forecasted demand for the each day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Security Stock (required minimum)''': It is derived by taking the forecasted demand for the next n days, where n is the number of day’s worth of security stock that is required at that warehouse, this parameter is set up at the item warehouse level. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Coverage Days''': It represent the number of days the stock will last if the POs not yet approved and the Expected receipts are not delivered, but the Planned issues, Planned transfers and Forecasted demand are fulfilled. If it is a negative number, it will be highlighted in red. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Provisional POs''': Purchase orders that have not been submitted yet. This POs will not have an impact on the closing inventory calculation, but it is important to review them frequently and either process them or cancel them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Suggested POs in forecasting period''': For the items where Forecasting period in the Item supplier warehouse table is greater than 0, Skylog provides a forecast of the purchase orders expected to be placed in future MRPs, during forecasting period. These Purchase orders are also known as planned orders or soft orders, and can be shared with suppliers for forward planning using [[MRP_EditSupplierForecast|Supplier Forecast functionality]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 planned POs.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Validated POs in forecasting period''': Material controllers can review and amend the quantities of the planned / forecasted purchase orders, by amending the quantity on this column for each individual item, or can be done for all the items from the same suppliers in [[MRP_EditSupplierForecast|Edit Supplier Forecast]] page. Once you have reviewed all the forecasted POs, you need to click &amp;quot;Confirm Forecasted POs&amp;quot;.  The Save and Exit and Save and continue commands at the bottom of the page will save the actions related to validation of POs.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Validate Planned POs MRP.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Closing stock with forecasted POs''': It is calculated by adding up the Starting inventory, the POs not yet approved, the Expected receipts, the suggested PO and the forecasted POs minus the planned issues, planned transfers and Forecasted demand for the each day. It assumes suggested PO and forecasted POs are placed and received.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 • '''Problem''': Is the Expected Closing Inventory level less than the Minimum Acceptable Inventory level.  If yes, then it’s a problem.  1 = It’s a problem, 0 = No problem envisaged.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt; Planned Issues&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It contains all the Planned issues in the [[#Planning timeline|planning timeline]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Planned issues tab.png|797px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt; Planned transfers&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It contains all the Planned Inter warehouse transfers in the [[#Planning timeline|planning timeline]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Planned transfers tab.png|797px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt; Unapproved POs&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It contains all the Purchase Orders in the [[#Planning timeline|planning timeline]] in awaiting approval, awaiting supplier commitment and partial supplier commitment statuses on specified date. This quantities impact on the calculation of the closing inventory count and therefore on the suggested of future Purchase Orders. It is important to review and action those Purchase Orders to avoid gaps in supply. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Unapproved POs.png|797px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt; Provisional POs&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase orders that have not been submitted yet, they are in provisional or pending user input status. This POs will not have an impact on the closing inventory calculation, but it is important to review them frequently and either process them or cancel them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200526 Provisional POs.png|797px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt; Supply Parameters&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This link will take you to a single page [[MRP_ShowMRPItemWarehouseSupplyParameters|Supply Parameters]] where you can update all the item supplier warehouse parameters impacting the MRP. Please note since the MRP is a picture in time, the effect of the changes will be visible in the next MRP after the change.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=PurchaseOrder_Index&amp;diff=2824</id>
		<title>PurchaseOrder Index</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=PurchaseOrder_Index&amp;diff=2824"/>
		<updated>2021-11-03T15:50:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please use our [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Tips_and_Tricks '''Tips and Tricks''']] page for understanding how the SkySuite portal works and how to navigate faster and easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Purchase Order (PO) is a commercial document created by the buyer, in this case the airline, to the supplier indicating the items, quantities, delivery INCOTERM, agreed prices and delivery date required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In SkyLog the following Purchasing documents can be used:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Non-Contracted POs (POs)''' are call-offs that are not linked to any other master document. Depending on the process setup with the customer, POs may require an approval (e.g. from the customer’s buyer, or based on the value of the PO), before they can be sent to the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''PO [Master] Contract (POMC)''' is the base/master agreement against which multiple call-offs (POs) can be placed with the supplier. The contract will contain the commercial agreement applicable to all subsequent POs: agreed prices, length, INCOTERMS and quantities. The advantage is that once the POMC is setup by the customer’s buyer (or a SLX Control Tower and approved by the customer) the Material Controller can place Contracted POs (CPOs) against the contract without individual CPOs approval required, unless, there are other approval conditions like CPO being subject to further approval based on value. [[PurchaseOrder_POContractIndex|''For more details regarding Contracts click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''PO Shipment''' From each PO or CPO one or more PO Shipments are created based on the expected delivery date (or expected delivery dates if the supplier has committed to multiple delivery schedules). The PO Shipment detail is sent via interface (EDI) to the Warehouse Management System (WMS)of the receiving warehouse a certain number of days before the shipment is due. The number of days is a configurable parameter that can be defined at the airline level. The warehouse will book the receipt against the PO Shipment. Once the PO shipment EDI has been sent to the warehouse, any changes done in SkyLog to the PO date will not be sent to the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Status&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Status&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Provisional&lt;br /&gt;
| When a purchase order is in the process of being created/defined (e.g. lines are being added to the Purchase Order) but importantly, it has not yet been submitted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pending User Input&lt;br /&gt;
| The PO has been created by another process within Skylog (e.g. MRP or Requisitioning) - the PO can be edited before it advances, e.g. free text comments can be added to it before it is shared with a partner system.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Outstanding&lt;br /&gt;
| Temporary status whilst the PO is awaiting export (being sent to a partner system via interface).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Acknowledgement&lt;br /&gt;
| The PO has been shared with a partner system and we are waiting for the partner to acknowledge receipt of the new [purchase] order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
| PO Requires approval - depending on configuration, this could be by a partner system (which must return an ApprovedPO EDI) OR it requires an authorized user to review the PO within the Skylog portal and take action to approve it without modification, reject it outright or amend it, then approve it.  For high value POs that require a 2-stage approval this is the first stage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pre-Approved&lt;br /&gt;
| Depending on configuration, For high value POs that required a 2-stage approval and the first stage approval has been completed. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Depending on configuration, the supplier may be expected to review the new order and pledge to commit to fulfilling it within the time requested.  The supplier may be able to oblige the order in full or he  may only be able to partially commit to fulfilling the order.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partial Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier has pledged their commitment to fulfill the PO but is either unable to supply the order in full or he may be able to supply all of the goods but can not meet the goods-required-by date(s).  The supplier's commitment will need to be reviewed by the operations team - depending on the outcome of the review, the PO may be rejected and the order placed with another supplier or the PO may advanced with revised quantities and/or delivery dates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Committed&lt;br /&gt;
|When the commitment stage has completed and the order is pending arrival at the delivery location. &lt;br /&gt;
Notes: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Depending on configuration, vendor commitment is optional thus a PO can reach this stage automatically - meaning that a supplier has NOT reviewed the PO and committed to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If a PO was in status: Partial Supplier Commitment and is deemed to be acceptable, it will advance to status &amp;quot;Supplier Fully Committed&amp;quot; even if the supplier has NOT fully committed to it.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Awaiting Supplier Shipment&lt;br /&gt;
|Depending upon configuration, the vendor is expected to notify SkyLog when the goods have been shipped. &lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• This is only possible if the airline is configured for the self-billing invoice module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Upon confirmation that the goods have been shipped, a self-billed invoice can be generated if invoicing for that supplier is configured to generate invoices when the goods are shipped; the supplier's action is the trigger to generate the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• It is only possible for the supplier to say that they have shipped all of the product, SkyLog currently does not allow the supplier to update SkyLog  that the order has only been partially dispatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Partially Shipped&lt;br /&gt;
|See note above, this status is effectively a place holder (for future development work) - today, it is NOT possible for a supplier to state that they have partially shipped an order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Shipped&lt;br /&gt;
|See note above, depending on configuration, if the supplier is required to update SkyLog when goods have been shipped, a PO will reach this status after they have marked the PO as having been shipped via the SkyLog portal.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received&lt;br /&gt;
|When the order has been partially receipt confirmed at the delivery location and additional goods on the order are still expected to arrive, or waiting for the Material Controller to confirm the decision regarding the balance in the Manage Purchase Order exception screen.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received, Closed&lt;br /&gt;
|When the order has been partially receipt confirmed at the delivery location and it is known that no further goods on the order will be delivered. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fully Received&lt;br /&gt;
|Order has been received in full.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rejected&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchase order was rejected at the approval stage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchase order was cancelled post-approval, e.g. we received an additional ApprovedPO EDI from a partner system advising us that the PO will not be fulfilled or we receive a cancellation ReceiptConfirmation(PO) EDI from the warehouse operator advising us that goods are not no longer expected to arrive at the delivery location / warehouse and the Material Controller has Closed the PO in the manage Purchase Order exception screen. [[#Cancelling Purchase Orders|''For more details regarding Cancelling POs click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Aborted&lt;br /&gt;
|PO was aborted whilst still at the provisional stage.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Creating Purchase Orders (POs)&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Contracted and Non-Contracted POs from scratch:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select ''MRP and Purchase Ordering'' and ''Create/Review POs'' option from the daily activities menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Create review PO.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. On Create/Review PO screen Click [[File:PlusPlus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3. If you have access to multiple airlines, select the Airline you want to create the PO for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Select airline.png|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The PO will be created with a Status Provisional. Click on [[File:20200603 SelectSupplier.png|200px]] and select the supplier you want to place the order with. You can use filters to find the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 SelectSupplier 2.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Select the destination type where you want the PO to be delivered. The option &amp;quot;Warehouse via Warehouse Transfer&amp;quot; applies when there is a warehouse set up as &amp;quot;transit only&amp;quot; = &amp;quot;YES&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Selectdestination createPO.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Depending upon your selection above, you will have the option to either:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Select a warehouse from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 selectwarehouse.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Click on &amp;quot;Select station&amp;quot; [[File:20200603 selectstation.png|200px]], to find an select the station you want to place the order against. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 selectstation2.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If you have chosen &amp;quot;Warehouse via Warehouse Transfer&amp;quot; destination type, you will need to select from the drop down lists the Destination warehouse, which should be set up as &amp;quot;Transit only&amp;quot; Warehouse, and the Ultimate warehouse. The &amp;quot;Transit Only&amp;quot; warehouse is a consolidation point, and does not hold inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 viatransfer.png|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Depending on the airline configuration, if the airline is set to link CPOs to a POMC (Contracts), then the Contract Reference field will be displayed, and the drop down list will contain the existing contracts for the Supplier - Destination combination selected above. If the contract has a Currency selected at the header level, then the currency will be displayed next to the contract reference. If no Contracts are available in the dropdown list, validate your selection of supplier and destination. If you choose to proceed without contract, SkyLog will take as the price the cost set in the stock item table which could potentially create issues with the supplier and the airline finance systems, additionally it will trigger an approval workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Selectcontract.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Choose a realistic required date and a comment if relevant and click save [[File:SaveSave.png|75px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. A new page will open allowing you to select the individual items, a PO number will be assigned and the Purchase order will be in status provisional. Before adding any new items to the PO, it is important to ensure that the header details are chosen, they will be prepopulated based on the contract if it was selected in the previous screen. Including Transport method selection, or editing supplier, required by date and contract. Contract can be selected using the Change Contract / Auto Match button if not yet selected. If CPO is being created a contract reference must be specified and &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; must be selected in the PO Contract Matching Exemption menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 PurchaseOrder Header.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Approval Reference is an optional field, and can be used in some airlines for POs that are needed by other areas of the business and cost need to be reallocated, or for major equipment, which normally requires to be linked to a project within the Airline finance system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The contract section highlighted in red, will be present depending upon configuration, if the airline is set to link CPOs to POMC, otherwise that section will not be part of the header. To use the Auto Match feature a PO must not already be linked to a Master Contract and not be exempt from contract matching. If the above is met clicking the Auto-Match will cause a pop up stating a match has been found. Clicking OK will link the PO to the match.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. To add items, you can click on [[File:PlusPlus.png]], that will redirect you to a new page to select the Item, add the Requested quantity (when you click on the arrow up it will increase the quantity in multiples of the MOQ), the Required date and a comment if relevant. Please note SkyLog will only display items which are part of the contract the CPO is linked to for contracted POs. In case of non-Contracted POs, the items to be displayed correspond to the items set up for the supplier warehouse combination for warehouse deliveries, or on the station par level for station deliveries. Once you select the item, SkyLog will Display the total eaches in Default pack and a link to view all the Item pack structure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 AddItem.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. Click save [[File:SaveSave.png|75px]]. Skylog will validate if the lead time is realistic based on the configuration in the system. In case it is not realistic, SkyLog will display a Warning for the Material Controller to validate and confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. Once you have finished adding all the items, you can click the refresh icon at the bottom of the PO header, to know what is the value of the PO you are placing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 RefreshPOValue.png|120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. In the item Details section, you can update the requested quantity, required date or comments for all the items. You can save the PO to continue later by clicking on Save and Continue or Save and Exit. If you want to submit the PO click on Submit, depending on the configuration and value of the PO this action may send the PO into an approval flow. If no approval flow applies, the PO will be generated and send to the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 PO item details.png|800px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you decide the PO is no longer required, you can click on Abort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have selected multiple dates for the different items and want to align them, you can change the date at the header level, and click update Line Dates From Header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to see the PO document that will be sent to the supplier, you can click on Generate PDF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Submitting Purchase Orders generated from MRP&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase orders generated from MRP are created in status &amp;quot;Pending User Input&amp;quot;, in order to submit click on the pencil symbol [[File:20200527 Edit.png|20px]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the supplier, dates and quantities for the item. Once all the information has been validated click submit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[MRP_Index|''For more details regarding MRP click this link'']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Purchase Order Approval&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending upon configuration, POs and CPOs may require approval by the airline, a buyer, or a higher level within the team. The reasons for a Purchase Order to require approval are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• POMC does not exist for the supplier, warehouse, item combination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Airline manages approval thresholds depending on the value of the PO. For example, if the PO value is below 30K, it can be approved by any material controller, but if the value of the PO exceeds 30K, then only certain users can approve the PO. In some airlines, there is a two steps process, where the POs are pre-approved by specific users, and a final approval is required by an airline representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Some airlines are set up to have all POs approved by the airline buyer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[PurchaseOrder_POPendingApprovalIndex|For more details regarding PO Approval click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Supplier Commitment&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[PurchaseInvoice_AwaitingCommitment|For more details regarding PO Supplier Commitment click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Editing Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Edit a PO, click on the pencil symbol [[File:20200527 Edit.png|20px]]. The information that can be edited on a PO will depend on its status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Status&lt;br /&gt;
! Editable information&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Provisional&lt;br /&gt;
| Supplier, preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, contract, dates, add or remove items, edit quantities, add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pending User Input&lt;br /&gt;
| Supplier, preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, contract, dates, add or remove items, edit quantities, add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
| Preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, dates, add tracking notes only by approver. Depending upon configuration, add or remove items, edit quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pre-Approved&lt;br /&gt;
| Preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, dates, add tracking notes only by approver. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Material controller can add tracking notes, it is only available for edition by supplier role.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Partial Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Material controller can either accept or reject the proposed schedule and add tracking notes. To view the proposed scheduled supplier has proposed, you should click in the &amp;quot;Delivery Schedule Information&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 DeliverySchedule.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
A new screen is displayed with the details of the proposed delivery schedule, and for the Material Controller to either accept or not the schedule proposed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 DeliverySchedule2.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Committed&lt;br /&gt;
| Material controller can edit the date at the header level and add tracking notes. The supplier role can amend dates at the PO shipment level. If the PO shipment is in status Awaiting Receipt and the expected arrival date is no longer accurate, you can amend the date via the cell on the data grid, then click &amp;quot;Save &amp;amp; Exit&amp;quot;. This will result in a new ReceiptAdvice EDI being sent to the warehouse, to advise them of the new expected arrival date for goods at their location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status of the PO shipment will then change to &amp;quot;Awaiting Acknowledgement&amp;quot; by default, but that status will only be temporary, until the warehouse mangement system has confirmed that it has received the updated information from Skylog. you can view the PO shipments in: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 PO shipments.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided the suppliers have created at least one delivery schedule when committing to the PO, they will be able to split the PO further, and update delivery dates. The planner can see which items have been changed in the Delivery schedule tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20210305 PO delivery schedule changes.png|900x]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Awaiting Supplier Shipment&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Shipped&lt;br /&gt;
|Expected date, transport reference and add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received&lt;br /&gt;
|Expected date that will apply for the outstanding quantities. Date can be edited at the header or item level. Also comments at the header or item level can be added or edited. Adding tracking notes. Also if PO is present in the manage purchase order exception screen, then the outstanding quantities can be closed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received, Closed&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fully Received&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes, create a clone PO to enable over receipts.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rejected&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Aborted&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Cancelling Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to cancel POs also depends on the PO status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Status&lt;br /&gt;
! How to Cancel PO&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Provisional&lt;br /&gt;
| Click on [[File:20200609 Abort.png|50px]]. Status will be aborted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pending User Input&lt;br /&gt;
| Click on [[File:20200609 Cancel PO.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
| The authorized approver clicks on [[File:20200609 Reject.png|50px]] to cancel PO. Status will be rejected after cancellation.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pre-Approved&lt;br /&gt;
| The authorized approver clicks on [[File:20200609 Reject.png|50px]] to cancel PO. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Supplier or Material controller clicks on [[File:202006 PO we wont commit.png|100px]] on the awaiting supplier commitment tab.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Partial Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Click on the &amp;quot;Delivery Schedule Information&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 DeliverySchedule.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click on [[File:20200609 PO schedule not acceptable.png|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Committed&lt;br /&gt;
| The procedure to cancel a PO in this status depends or whether SkyLog has already send ReceiveAdvice EDI to the warehouse. To check this, you can click on the PO shipments tab in: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 PO shipments.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the tab does not exist or there are no shipments in status &amp;quot;awaiting receipt&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;awaiting acknowledgement&amp;quot;, then it means no EDIs have been sent yet. In that case, the option [[File:20200609 Close PO.png|70px]] will be available, and you will need to select a valid reason for cancelling the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 Cancelation reason.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the EDI has already been sent to the warehouse, this is when there are PO shipments in status &amp;quot;Awaiting receipt&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Awaiting acknowledgement&amp;quot;, then you should request the Warehouse provider to zero receive the PO; the PO will then be available in the Manage purchase order exception screen. From the manage purchase order exceptions screen, click on [[File:20200609 Close PO.png|70px]] and select a reason for cancelling the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 Cancelation reason.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Creating Clone Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some clients are configured to allow a purchase order to be cloned.  This can be used when a vendor has over-delivered on a given purchase order - a copy of the original PO can be created to allow for the excess stock to be receipt confirmed (note that SkyLog does not support over-receiving a purchase order).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a PO is cloned, the clone-PO (also known as a covert order) is not shared with the vendor, the vendor will not be notified when it is created - thus there should be no chance that the vendor will fulfill the new, spin-off, purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Notes&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* This feature is only applicable to some customers, if you are unsure if your airline is configured with this functionality enabled or not, please contact the support team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A purchase order can only be cloned &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;ONCE&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; - thus if there has been an over-delivery against a particular order, there is ONE opportunity to capture details of the excess stock that was delivered agaisnt it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a limited time window in which an over-received purchase order can be cloned.  It is assumed that if a vendor has over delivered against an order, this will come to light quickly - e.g. the supplier was supposed to deliver 100 boxes of product but upon counting the stock, they've actually delivered 105 boxes and the vendor  has invoiced for 105 boxes accordingly.  The planning team have six weeks in which to clone the original (over-received) order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is only possible to clone a purchase that has been concluded with stock receipt - thus if a purchase is in status: &amp;quot;Partially Received&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Supplier Fully Committed&amp;quot; it will not be eligible for cloning.  Thus only purchase orders in status: Fully Received can be cloned &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;(note: need to check if its possible to clone a PO in status: &amp;quot;Partially Received, Closed&amp;quot;.)&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clone an over-received puchase order, find the order on the regular purchase order listing page and then click on the 'Edit' icon.  A dialog box will be presented and if the order is eligible for cloning you will see a button to do so; please see below for an illustration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateClonePurchaseOrder.PNG]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=PurchaseOrder_Index&amp;diff=2823</id>
		<title>PurchaseOrder Index</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=PurchaseOrder_Index&amp;diff=2823"/>
		<updated>2021-11-03T15:48:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please use our [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Tips_and_Tricks '''Tips and Tricks''']] page for understanding how the SkySuite portal works and how to navigate faster and easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Purchase Order (PO) is a commercial document created by the buyer, in this case the airline, to the supplier indicating the items, quantities, delivery INCOTERM, agreed prices and delivery date required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In SkyLog the following Purchasing documents can be used:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Non-Contracted POs (POs)''' are call-offs that are not linked to any other master document. Depending on the process setup with the customer, POs may require an approval (e.g. from the customer’s buyer, or based on the value of the PO), before they can be sent to the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''PO [Master] Contract (POMC)''' is the base/master agreement against which multiple call-offs (POs) can be placed with the supplier. The contract will contain the commercial agreement applicable to all subsequent POs: agreed prices, length, INCOTERMS and quantities. The advantage is that once the POMC is setup by the customer’s buyer (or a SLX Control Tower and approved by the customer) the Material Controller can place Contracted POs (CPOs) against the contract without individual CPOs approval required, unless, there are other approval conditions like CPO being subject to further approval based on value. [[PurchaseOrder_POContractIndex|''For more details regarding Contracts click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''PO Shipment''' From each PO or CPO one or more PO Shipments are created based on the expected delivery date (or expected delivery dates if the supplier has committed to multiple delivery schedules). The PO Shipment detail is sent via interface (EDI) to the Warehouse Management System (WMS)of the receiving warehouse a certain number of days before the shipment is due. The number of days is a configurable parameter that can be defined at the airline level. The warehouse will book the receipt against the PO Shipment. Once the PO shipment EDI has been sent to the warehouse, any changes done in SkyLog to the PO date will not be sent to the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Status&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Status&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Provisional&lt;br /&gt;
| When a purchase order is in the process of being created/defined (e.g. lines are being added to the Purchase Order) but importantly, it has not yet been submitted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pending User Input&lt;br /&gt;
| The PO has been created by another process within Skylog (e.g. MRP or Requisitioning) - the PO can be edited before it advances, e.g. free text comments can be added to it before it is shared with a partner system.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Outstanding&lt;br /&gt;
| Temporary status whilst the PO is awaiting export (being sent to a partner system via interface).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Acknowledgement&lt;br /&gt;
| The PO has been shared with a partner system and we are waiting for the partner to acknowledge receipt of the new [purchase] order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
| PO Requires approval - depending on configuration, this could be by a partner system (which must return an ApprovedPO EDI) OR it requires an authorized user to review the PO within the Skylog portal and take action to approve it without modification, reject it outright or amend it, then approve it.  For high value POs that require a 2-stage approval this is the first stage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pre-Approved&lt;br /&gt;
| Depending on configuration, For high value POs that required a 2-stage approval and the first stage approval has been completed. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Depending on configuration, the supplier may be expected to review the new order and pledge to commit to fulfilling it within the time requested.  The supplier may be able to oblige the order in full or he  may only be able to partially commit to fulfilling the order.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partial Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier has pledged their commitment to fulfill the PO but is either unable to supply the order in full or he may be able to supply all of the goods but can not meet the goods-required-by date(s).  The supplier's commitment will need to be reviewed by the operations team - depending on the outcome of the review, the PO may be rejected and the order placed with another supplier or the PO may advanced with revised quantities and/or delivery dates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Committed&lt;br /&gt;
|When the commitment stage has completed and the order is pending arrival at the delivery location. &lt;br /&gt;
Notes: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Depending on configuration, vendor commitment is optional thus a PO can reach this stage automatically - meaning that a supplier has NOT reviewed the PO and committed to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If a PO was in status: Partial Supplier Commitment and is deemed to be acceptable, it will advance to status &amp;quot;Supplier Fully Committed&amp;quot; even if the supplier has NOT fully committed to it.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Awaiting Supplier Shipment&lt;br /&gt;
|Depending upon configuration, the vendor is expected to notify SkyLog when the goods have been shipped. &lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• This is only possible if the airline is configured for the self-billing invoice module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Upon confirmation that the goods have been shipped, a self-billed invoice can be generated if invoicing for that supplier is configured to generate invoices when the goods are shipped; the supplier's action is the trigger to generate the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• It is only possible for the supplier to say that they have shipped all of the product, SkyLog currently does not allow the supplier to update SkyLog  that the order has only been partially dispatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Partially Shipped&lt;br /&gt;
|See note above, this status is effectively a place holder (for future development work) - today, it is NOT possible for a supplier to state that they have partially shipped an order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Shipped&lt;br /&gt;
|See note above, depending on configuration, if the supplier is required to update SkyLog when goods have been shipped, a PO will reach this status after they have marked the PO as having been shipped via the SkyLog portal.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received&lt;br /&gt;
|When the order has been partially receipt confirmed at the delivery location and additional goods on the order are still expected to arrive, or waiting for the Material Controller to confirm the decision regarding the balance in the Manage Purchase Order exception screen.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received, Closed&lt;br /&gt;
|When the order has been partially receipt confirmed at the delivery location and it is known that no further goods on the order will be delivered. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fully Received&lt;br /&gt;
|Order has been received in full.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rejected&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchase order was rejected at the approval stage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchase order was cancelled post-approval, e.g. we received an additional ApprovedPO EDI from a partner system advising us that the PO will not be fulfilled or we receive a cancellation ReceiptConfirmation(PO) EDI from the warehouse operator advising us that goods are not no longer expected to arrive at the delivery location / warehouse and the Material Controller has Closed the PO in the manage Purchase Order exception screen. [[#Cancelling Purchase Orders|''For more details regarding Cancelling POs click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Aborted&lt;br /&gt;
|PO was aborted whilst still at the provisional stage.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Creating Purchase Orders (POs)&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Contracted and Non-Contracted POs from scratch:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select ''MRP and Purchase Ordering'' and ''Create/Review POs'' option from the daily activities menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Create review PO.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. On Create/Review PO screen Click [[File:PlusPlus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3. If you have access to multiple airlines, select the Airline you want to create the PO for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Select airline.png|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The PO will be created with a Status Provisional. Click on [[File:20200603 SelectSupplier.png|200px]] and select the supplier you want to place the order with. You can use filters to find the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 SelectSupplier 2.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Select the destination type where you want the PO to be delivered. The option &amp;quot;Warehouse via Warehouse Transfer&amp;quot; applies when there is a warehouse set up as &amp;quot;transit only&amp;quot; = &amp;quot;YES&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Selectdestination createPO.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Depending upon your selection above, you will have the option to either:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Select a warehouse from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 selectwarehouse.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Click on &amp;quot;Select station&amp;quot; [[File:20200603 selectstation.png|200px]], to find an select the station you want to place the order against. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 selectstation2.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If you have chosen &amp;quot;Warehouse via Warehouse Transfer&amp;quot; destination type, you will need to select from the drop down lists the Destination warehouse, which should be set up as &amp;quot;Transit only&amp;quot; Warehouse, and the Ultimate warehouse. The &amp;quot;Transit Only&amp;quot; warehouse is a consolidation point, and does not hold inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 viatransfer.png|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Depending on the airline configuration, if the airline is set to link CPOs to a POMC (Contracts), then the Contract Reference field will be displayed, and the drop down list will contain the existing contracts for the Supplier - Destination combination selected above. If the contract has a Currency selected at the header level, then the currency will be displayed next to the contract reference. If no Contracts are available in the dropdown list, validate your selection of supplier and destination. If you choose to proceed without contract, SkyLog will take as the price the cost set in the stock item table which could potentially create issues with the supplier and the airline finance systems, additionally it will trigger an approval workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Selectcontract.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Choose a realistic required date and a comment if relevant and click save [[File:SaveSave.png|75px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. A new page will open allowing you to select the individual items, a PO number will be assigned and the Purchase order will be in status provisional. Before adding any new items to the PO, it is important to ensure that the header details are chosen, they will be prepopulated based on the contract if it was selected in the previous screen. Including Transport method selection, or editing supplier, required by date and contract. Contract can be selected using the Change Contract / Auto Match button if not yet selected. If CPO is being created a contract reference must be specified and &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; must be selected in the PO Contract Matching Exemption menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 PurchaseOrder Header.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Approval Reference is an optional field, and can be used in some airlines for POs that are needed by other areas of the business and cost need to be reallocated, or for major equipment, which normally requires to be linked to a project within the Airline finance system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The contract section highlighted in red, will be present depending upon configuration, if the airline is set to link CPOs to POMC, otherwise that section will not be part of the header. To use the Auto Match feature a PO must not already be linked to a Master Contract and not be exempt from contract matching. If the above is met clicking the Auto-Match will cause a pop up stating a match has been found. Clicking OK will link the PO to the match.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. To add items, you can click on [[File:PlusPlus.png]], that will redirect you to a new page to select the Item, add the Requested quantity (when you click on the arrow up it will increase the quantity in multiples of the MOQ), the Required date and a comment if relevant. Please note SkyLog will only display items which are part of the contract the CPO is linked to for contracted POs. In case of non-Contracted POs, the items to be displayed correspond to the items set up for the supplier warehouse combination for warehouse deliveries, or on the station par level for station deliveries. Once you select the item, SkyLog will Display the total eaches in Default pack and a link to view all the Item pack structure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 AddItem.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. Click save [[File:SaveSave.png|75px]]. Skylog will validate if the lead time is realistic based on the configuration in the system. In case it is not realistic, SkyLog will display a Warning for the Material Controller to validate and confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. Once you have finished adding all the items, you can click the refresh icon at the bottom of the PO header, to know what is the value of the PO you are placing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 RefreshPOValue.png|120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. In the item Details section, you can update the requested quantity, required date or comments for all the items. You can save the PO to continue later by clicking on Save and Continue or Save and Exit. If you want to submit the PO click on Submit, depending on the configuration and value of the PO this action may send the PO into an approval flow. If no approval flow applies, the PO will be generated and send to the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 PO item details.png|800px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you decide the PO is no longer required, you can click on Abort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have selected multiple dates for the different items and want to align them, you can change the date at the header level, and click update Line Dates From Header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to see the PO document that will be sent to the supplier, you can click on Generate PDF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Submitting Purchase Orders generated from MRP&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase orders generated from MRP are created in status &amp;quot;Pending User Input&amp;quot;, in order to submit click on the pencil symbol [[File:20200527 Edit.png|20px]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the supplier, dates and quantities for the item. Once all the information has been validated click submit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[MRP_Index|''For more details regarding MRP click this link'']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Purchase Order Approval&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending upon configuration, POs and CPOs may require approval by the airline, a buyer, or a higher level within the team. The reasons for a Purchase Order to require approval are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• POMC does not exist for the supplier, warehouse, item combination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Airline manages approval thresholds depending on the value of the PO. For example, if the PO value is below 30K, it can be approved by any material controller, but if the value of the PO exceeds 30K, then only certain users can approve the PO. In some airlines, there is a two steps process, where the POs are pre-approved by specific users, and a final approval is required by an airline representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Some airlines are set up to have all POs approved by the airline buyer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[PurchaseOrder_POPendingApprovalIndex|For more details regarding PO Approval click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Supplier Commitment&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[PurchaseInvoice_AwaitingCommitment|For more details regarding PO Supplier Commitment click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Editing Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Edit a PO, click on the pencil symbol [[File:20200527 Edit.png|20px]]. The information that can be edited on a PO will depend on its status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Status&lt;br /&gt;
! Editable information&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Provisional&lt;br /&gt;
| Supplier, preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, contract, dates, add or remove items, edit quantities, add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pending User Input&lt;br /&gt;
| Supplier, preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, contract, dates, add or remove items, edit quantities, add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
| Preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, dates, add tracking notes only by approver. Depending upon configuration, add or remove items, edit quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pre-Approved&lt;br /&gt;
| Preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, dates, add tracking notes only by approver. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Material controller can add tracking notes, it is only available for edition by supplier role.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Partial Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Material controller can either accept or reject the proposed schedule and add tracking notes. To view the proposed scheduled supplier has proposed, you should click in the &amp;quot;Delivery Schedule Information&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 DeliverySchedule.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
A new screen is displayed with the details of the proposed delivery schedule, and for the Material Controller to either accept or not the schedule proposed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 DeliverySchedule2.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Committed&lt;br /&gt;
| Material controller can edit the date at the header level and add tracking notes. The supplier role can amend dates at the PO shipment level. If the PO shipment is in status Awaiting Receipt and the expected arrival date is no longer accurate, you can amend the date via the cell on the data grid, then click &amp;quot;Save &amp;amp; Exit&amp;quot;. This will result in a new ReceiptAdvice EDI being sent to the warehouse, to advise them of the new expected arrival date for goods at their location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status of the PO shipment will then change to &amp;quot;Awaiting Acknowledgement&amp;quot; by default, but that status will only be temporary, until the warehouse mangement system has confirmed that it has received the updated information from Skylog. you can view the PO shipments in: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 PO shipments.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided the suppliers have created at least one delivery schedule when committing to the PO, they will be able to split the PO further, and update delivery dates. The planner can see which items have been changed in the Delivery schedule tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20210305 PO delivery schedule changes.png|900x]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Awaiting Supplier Shipment&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Shipped&lt;br /&gt;
|Expected date, transport reference and add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received&lt;br /&gt;
|Expected date that will apply for the outstanding quantities. Date can be edited at the header or item level. Also comments at the header or item level can be added or edited. Adding tracking notes. Also if PO is present in the manage purchase order exception screen, then the outstanding quantities can be closed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received, Closed&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fully Received&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes, create a clone PO to enable over receipts.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rejected&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Aborted&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Cancelling Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to cancel POs also depends on the PO status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Status&lt;br /&gt;
! How to Cancel PO&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Provisional&lt;br /&gt;
| Click on [[File:20200609 Abort.png|50px]]. Status will be aborted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pending User Input&lt;br /&gt;
| Click on [[File:20200609 Cancel PO.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
| The authorized approver clicks on [[File:20200609 Reject.png|50px]] to cancel PO. Status will be rejected after cancellation.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pre-Approved&lt;br /&gt;
| The authorized approver clicks on [[File:20200609 Reject.png|50px]] to cancel PO. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Supplier or Material controller clicks on [[File:202006 PO we wont commit.png|100px]] on the awaiting supplier commitment tab.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Partial Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Click on the &amp;quot;Delivery Schedule Information&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 DeliverySchedule.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click on [[File:20200609 PO schedule not acceptable.png|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Committed&lt;br /&gt;
| The procedure to cancel a PO in this status depends or whether SkyLog has already send ReceiveAdvice EDI to the warehouse. To check this, you can click on the PO shipments tab in: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 PO shipments.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the tab does not exist or there are no shipments in status &amp;quot;awaiting receipt&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;awaiting acknowledgement&amp;quot;, then it means no EDIs have been sent yet. In that case, the option [[File:20200609 Close PO.png|70px]] will be available, and you will need to select a valid reason for cancelling the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 Cancelation reason.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the EDI has already been sent to the warehouse, this is when there are PO shipments in status &amp;quot;Awaiting receipt&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Awaiting acknowledgement&amp;quot;, then you should request the Warehouse provider to zero receive the PO; the PO will then be available in the Manage purchase order exception screen. From the manage purchase order exceptions screen, click on [[File:20200609 Close PO.png|70px]] and select a reason for cancelling the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 Cancelation reason.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Creating Clone Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some clients are configured to allow a purchase order to be cloned.  This can be used when a vendor has over-delivered on a given purchase order - a copy of the original PO can be created to allow for the excess stock to be receipt confirmed (note that SkyLog does not support over-receiving a purchase order).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a PO is cloned, the clone-PO (also known as a covert order) is not shared with the vendor, the vendor will not be notified when it is created - thus there should be no chance that the vendor will fulfill the new, spin-off, purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Notes&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* This feature is only applicable to some customers, if you are unsure if your airline is configured with this functionality enabled or not, please contact the support team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A purchase order can only be cloned &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;ONCE&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; - thus if there has been an over-delivery against a particular order, there is ONE opportunity to capture details of the excess stock that was delivered agaisnt it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a limited time window in which an over-received purchase order can be cloned.  It is assumed that if a vendor has over delivered against an order, this will come to light quickly - e.g. the supplier was supposed to deliver 100 boxes of product but upon counting the stock, they've actually delivered 105 boxes and the vendor  has invoiced for 105 boxes accordingly.  The planning team have six weeks in which to clone the original (over-received) order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is only possible to clone a purchase that has been concluded with stock receipt - thus if a purchase is in status: &amp;quot;Partially Received&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Supplier Fully Committed&amp;quot; it will not be eligible for cloning.  Thus only purchase orders in status: Fully Received can be cloned &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;(note: need to check if its possible to clone a PO in status: &amp;quot;Partially Received, Closed&amp;quot;.)&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clone an over-received puchase order, find the order and then click on the Edit icon.  A dialog box will be presented and if the order is eligible for cloning yuou will see a button to do so, please see below as an illustration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateClonePurchaseOrder.PNG]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:CreateClonePurchaseOrder.PNG&amp;diff=2822</id>
		<title>File:CreateClonePurchaseOrder.PNG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=File:CreateClonePurchaseOrder.PNG&amp;diff=2822"/>
		<updated>2021-11-03T15:44:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: How to create a clone order against a purchase order which has been over-delivered by the vendor.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
How to create a clone order against a purchase order which has been over-delivered by the vendor.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=PurchaseOrder_Index&amp;diff=2821</id>
		<title>PurchaseOrder Index</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=PurchaseOrder_Index&amp;diff=2821"/>
		<updated>2021-11-03T15:41:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please use our [[http://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Tips_and_Tricks '''Tips and Tricks''']] page for understanding how the SkySuite portal works and how to navigate faster and easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Purchase Order (PO) is a commercial document created by the buyer, in this case the airline, to the supplier indicating the items, quantities, delivery INCOTERM, agreed prices and delivery date required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In SkyLog the following Purchasing documents can be used:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''Non-Contracted POs (POs)''' are call-offs that are not linked to any other master document. Depending on the process setup with the customer, POs may require an approval (e.g. from the customer’s buyer, or based on the value of the PO), before they can be sent to the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''PO [Master] Contract (POMC)''' is the base/master agreement against which multiple call-offs (POs) can be placed with the supplier. The contract will contain the commercial agreement applicable to all subsequent POs: agreed prices, length, INCOTERMS and quantities. The advantage is that once the POMC is setup by the customer’s buyer (or a SLX Control Tower and approved by the customer) the Material Controller can place Contracted POs (CPOs) against the contract without individual CPOs approval required, unless, there are other approval conditions like CPO being subject to further approval based on value. [[PurchaseOrder_POContractIndex|''For more details regarding Contracts click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• '''PO Shipment''' From each PO or CPO one or more PO Shipments are created based on the expected delivery date (or expected delivery dates if the supplier has committed to multiple delivery schedules). The PO Shipment detail is sent via interface (EDI) to the Warehouse Management System (WMS)of the receiving warehouse a certain number of days before the shipment is due. The number of days is a configurable parameter that can be defined at the airline level. The warehouse will book the receipt against the PO Shipment. Once the PO shipment EDI has been sent to the warehouse, any changes done in SkyLog to the PO date will not be sent to the WMS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Status&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Status&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Provisional&lt;br /&gt;
| When a purchase order is in the process of being created/defined (e.g. lines are being added to the Purchase Order) but importantly, it has not yet been submitted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pending User Input&lt;br /&gt;
| The PO has been created by another process within Skylog (e.g. MRP or Requisitioning) - the PO can be edited before it advances, e.g. free text comments can be added to it before it is shared with a partner system.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Outstanding&lt;br /&gt;
| Temporary status whilst the PO is awaiting export (being sent to a partner system via interface).&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Acknowledgement&lt;br /&gt;
| The PO has been shared with a partner system and we are waiting for the partner to acknowledge receipt of the new [purchase] order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
| PO Requires approval - depending on configuration, this could be by a partner system (which must return an ApprovedPO EDI) OR it requires an authorized user to review the PO within the Skylog portal and take action to approve it without modification, reject it outright or amend it, then approve it.  For high value POs that require a 2-stage approval this is the first stage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pre-Approved&lt;br /&gt;
| Depending on configuration, For high value POs that required a 2-stage approval and the first stage approval has been completed. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Depending on configuration, the supplier may be expected to review the new order and pledge to commit to fulfilling it within the time requested.  The supplier may be able to oblige the order in full or he  may only be able to partially commit to fulfilling the order.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partial Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier has pledged their commitment to fulfill the PO but is either unable to supply the order in full or he may be able to supply all of the goods but can not meet the goods-required-by date(s).  The supplier's commitment will need to be reviewed by the operations team - depending on the outcome of the review, the PO may be rejected and the order placed with another supplier or the PO may advanced with revised quantities and/or delivery dates.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Committed&lt;br /&gt;
|When the commitment stage has completed and the order is pending arrival at the delivery location. &lt;br /&gt;
Notes: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Depending on configuration, vendor commitment is optional thus a PO can reach this stage automatically - meaning that a supplier has NOT reviewed the PO and committed to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If a PO was in status: Partial Supplier Commitment and is deemed to be acceptable, it will advance to status &amp;quot;Supplier Fully Committed&amp;quot; even if the supplier has NOT fully committed to it.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Awaiting Supplier Shipment&lt;br /&gt;
|Depending upon configuration, the vendor is expected to notify SkyLog when the goods have been shipped. &lt;br /&gt;
Notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• This is only possible if the airline is configured for the self-billing invoice module&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Upon confirmation that the goods have been shipped, a self-billed invoice can be generated if invoicing for that supplier is configured to generate invoices when the goods are shipped; the supplier's action is the trigger to generate the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• It is only possible for the supplier to say that they have shipped all of the product, SkyLog currently does not allow the supplier to update SkyLog  that the order has only been partially dispatched.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Partially Shipped&lt;br /&gt;
|See note above, this status is effectively a place holder (for future development work) - today, it is NOT possible for a supplier to state that they have partially shipped an order.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Shipped&lt;br /&gt;
|See note above, depending on configuration, if the supplier is required to update SkyLog when goods have been shipped, a PO will reach this status after they have marked the PO as having been shipped via the SkyLog portal.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received&lt;br /&gt;
|When the order has been partially receipt confirmed at the delivery location and additional goods on the order are still expected to arrive, or waiting for the Material Controller to confirm the decision regarding the balance in the Manage Purchase Order exception screen.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received, Closed&lt;br /&gt;
|When the order has been partially receipt confirmed at the delivery location and it is known that no further goods on the order will be delivered. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fully Received&lt;br /&gt;
|Order has been received in full.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rejected&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchase order was rejected at the approval stage.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
|Purchase order was cancelled post-approval, e.g. we received an additional ApprovedPO EDI from a partner system advising us that the PO will not be fulfilled or we receive a cancellation ReceiptConfirmation(PO) EDI from the warehouse operator advising us that goods are not no longer expected to arrive at the delivery location / warehouse and the Material Controller has Closed the PO in the manage Purchase Order exception screen. [[#Cancelling Purchase Orders|''For more details regarding Cancelling POs click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Aborted&lt;br /&gt;
|PO was aborted whilst still at the provisional stage.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Creating Purchase Orders (POs)&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a Contracted and Non-Contracted POs from scratch:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Select ''MRP and Purchase Ordering'' and ''Create/Review POs'' option from the daily activities menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Create review PO.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. On Create/Review PO screen Click [[File:PlusPlus.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
3. If you have access to multiple airlines, select the Airline you want to create the PO for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Select airline.png|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. The PO will be created with a Status Provisional. Click on [[File:20200603 SelectSupplier.png|200px]] and select the supplier you want to place the order with. You can use filters to find the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 SelectSupplier 2.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Select the destination type where you want the PO to be delivered. The option &amp;quot;Warehouse via Warehouse Transfer&amp;quot; applies when there is a warehouse set up as &amp;quot;transit only&amp;quot; = &amp;quot;YES&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Selectdestination createPO.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Depending upon your selection above, you will have the option to either:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Select a warehouse from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 selectwarehouse.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Click on &amp;quot;Select station&amp;quot; [[File:20200603 selectstation.png|200px]], to find an select the station you want to place the order against. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 selectstation2.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• If you have chosen &amp;quot;Warehouse via Warehouse Transfer&amp;quot; destination type, you will need to select from the drop down lists the Destination warehouse, which should be set up as &amp;quot;Transit only&amp;quot; Warehouse, and the Ultimate warehouse. The &amp;quot;Transit Only&amp;quot; warehouse is a consolidation point, and does not hold inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 viatransfer.png|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Depending on the airline configuration, if the airline is set to link CPOs to a POMC (Contracts), then the Contract Reference field will be displayed, and the drop down list will contain the existing contracts for the Supplier - Destination combination selected above. If the contract has a Currency selected at the header level, then the currency will be displayed next to the contract reference. If no Contracts are available in the dropdown list, validate your selection of supplier and destination. If you choose to proceed without contract, SkyLog will take as the price the cost set in the stock item table which could potentially create issues with the supplier and the airline finance systems, additionally it will trigger an approval workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 Selectcontract.png|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Choose a realistic required date and a comment if relevant and click save [[File:SaveSave.png|75px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. A new page will open allowing you to select the individual items, a PO number will be assigned and the Purchase order will be in status provisional. Before adding any new items to the PO, it is important to ensure that the header details are chosen, they will be prepopulated based on the contract if it was selected in the previous screen. Including Transport method selection, or editing supplier, required by date and contract. Contract can be selected using the Change Contract / Auto Match button if not yet selected. If CPO is being created a contract reference must be specified and &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; must be selected in the PO Contract Matching Exemption menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 PurchaseOrder Header.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Approval Reference is an optional field, and can be used in some airlines for POs that are needed by other areas of the business and cost need to be reallocated, or for major equipment, which normally requires to be linked to a project within the Airline finance system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The contract section highlighted in red, will be present depending upon configuration, if the airline is set to link CPOs to POMC, otherwise that section will not be part of the header. To use the Auto Match feature a PO must not already be linked to a Master Contract and not be exempt from contract matching. If the above is met clicking the Auto-Match will cause a pop up stating a match has been found. Clicking OK will link the PO to the match.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. To add items, you can click on [[File:PlusPlus.png]], that will redirect you to a new page to select the Item, add the Requested quantity (when you click on the arrow up it will increase the quantity in multiples of the MOQ), the Required date and a comment if relevant. Please note SkyLog will only display items which are part of the contract the CPO is linked to for contracted POs. In case of non-Contracted POs, the items to be displayed correspond to the items set up for the supplier warehouse combination for warehouse deliveries, or on the station par level for station deliveries. Once you select the item, SkyLog will Display the total eaches in Default pack and a link to view all the Item pack structure. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 AddItem.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
11. Click save [[File:SaveSave.png|75px]]. Skylog will validate if the lead time is realistic based on the configuration in the system. In case it is not realistic, SkyLog will display a Warning for the Material Controller to validate and confirm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
12. Once you have finished adding all the items, you can click the refresh icon at the bottom of the PO header, to know what is the value of the PO you are placing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 RefreshPOValue.png|120px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
13. In the item Details section, you can update the requested quantity, required date or comments for all the items. You can save the PO to continue later by clicking on Save and Continue or Save and Exit. If you want to submit the PO click on Submit, depending on the configuration and value of the PO this action may send the PO into an approval flow. If no approval flow applies, the PO will be generated and send to the supplier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200603 PO item details.png|800px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you decide the PO is no longer required, you can click on Abort.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have selected multiple dates for the different items and want to align them, you can change the date at the header level, and click update Line Dates From Header.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to see the PO document that will be sent to the supplier, you can click on Generate PDF.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Submitting Purchase Orders generated from MRP&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Purchase orders generated from MRP are created in status &amp;quot;Pending User Input&amp;quot;, in order to submit click on the pencil symbol [[File:20200527 Edit.png|20px]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the supplier, dates and quantities for the item. Once all the information has been validated click submit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[MRP_Index|''For more details regarding MRP click this link'']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Purchase Order Approval&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending upon configuration, POs and CPOs may require approval by the airline, a buyer, or a higher level within the team. The reasons for a Purchase Order to require approval are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• POMC does not exist for the supplier, warehouse, item combination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Airline manages approval thresholds depending on the value of the PO. For example, if the PO value is below 30K, it can be approved by any material controller, but if the value of the PO exceeds 30K, then only certain users can approve the PO. In some airlines, there is a two steps process, where the POs are pre-approved by specific users, and a final approval is required by an airline representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Some airlines are set up to have all POs approved by the airline buyer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[PurchaseOrder_POPendingApprovalIndex|For more details regarding PO Approval click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Supplier Commitment&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[PurchaseInvoice_AwaitingCommitment|For more details regarding PO Supplier Commitment click this link''']]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Editing Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To Edit a PO, click on the pencil symbol [[File:20200527 Edit.png|20px]]. The information that can be edited on a PO will depend on its status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Status&lt;br /&gt;
! Editable information&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Provisional&lt;br /&gt;
| Supplier, preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, contract, dates, add or remove items, edit quantities, add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pending User Input&lt;br /&gt;
| Supplier, preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, contract, dates, add or remove items, edit quantities, add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
| Preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, dates, add tracking notes only by approver. Depending upon configuration, add or remove items, edit quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pre-Approved&lt;br /&gt;
| Preferred mode of transport, approval reference, comments, dates, add tracking notes only by approver. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Material controller can add tracking notes, it is only available for edition by supplier role.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Partial Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Material controller can either accept or reject the proposed schedule and add tracking notes. To view the proposed scheduled supplier has proposed, you should click in the &amp;quot;Delivery Schedule Information&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 DeliverySchedule.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
A new screen is displayed with the details of the proposed delivery schedule, and for the Material Controller to either accept or not the schedule proposed.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 DeliverySchedule2.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Committed&lt;br /&gt;
| Material controller can edit the date at the header level and add tracking notes. The supplier role can amend dates at the PO shipment level. If the PO shipment is in status Awaiting Receipt and the expected arrival date is no longer accurate, you can amend the date via the cell on the data grid, then click &amp;quot;Save &amp;amp; Exit&amp;quot;. This will result in a new ReceiptAdvice EDI being sent to the warehouse, to advise them of the new expected arrival date for goods at their location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status of the PO shipment will then change to &amp;quot;Awaiting Acknowledgement&amp;quot; by default, but that status will only be temporary, until the warehouse mangement system has confirmed that it has received the updated information from Skylog. you can view the PO shipments in: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 PO shipments.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Provided the suppliers have created at least one delivery schedule when committing to the PO, they will be able to split the PO further, and update delivery dates. The planner can see which items have been changed in the Delivery schedule tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20210305 PO delivery schedule changes.png|900x]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Awaiting Supplier Shipment&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Shipped&lt;br /&gt;
|Expected date, transport reference and add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received&lt;br /&gt;
|Expected date that will apply for the outstanding quantities. Date can be edited at the header or item level. Also comments at the header or item level can be added or edited. Adding tracking notes. Also if PO is present in the manage purchase order exception screen, then the outstanding quantities can be closed.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Partially Received, Closed&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Fully Received&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes, create a clone PO to enable over receipts.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Rejected&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Cancelled&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Aborted&lt;br /&gt;
|Add tracking notes.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Cancelling Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The process to cancel POs also depends on the PO status&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
! Status&lt;br /&gt;
! How to Cancel PO&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Provisional&lt;br /&gt;
| Click on [[File:20200609 Abort.png|50px]]. Status will be aborted.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pending User Input&lt;br /&gt;
| Click on [[File:20200609 Cancel PO.png|80px]].&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Approval&lt;br /&gt;
| The authorized approver clicks on [[File:20200609 Reject.png|50px]] to cancel PO. Status will be rejected after cancellation.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Pre-Approved&lt;br /&gt;
| The authorized approver clicks on [[File:20200609 Reject.png|50px]] to cancel PO. &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Awaiting Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Supplier or Material controller clicks on [[File:202006 PO we wont commit.png|100px]] on the awaiting supplier commitment tab.  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Partial Supplier Commitment&lt;br /&gt;
| Click on the &amp;quot;Delivery Schedule Information&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 DeliverySchedule.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Click on [[File:20200609 PO schedule not acceptable.png|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|Supplier Fully Committed&lt;br /&gt;
| The procedure to cancel a PO in this status depends or whether SkyLog has already send ReceiveAdvice EDI to the warehouse. To check this, you can click on the PO shipments tab in: &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 PO shipments.png|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the tab does not exist or there are no shipments in status &amp;quot;awaiting receipt&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;awaiting acknowledgement&amp;quot;, then it means no EDIs have been sent yet. In that case, the option [[File:20200609 Close PO.png|70px]] will be available, and you will need to select a valid reason for cancelling the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 Cancelation reason.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the EDI has already been sent to the warehouse, this is when there are PO shipments in status &amp;quot;Awaiting receipt&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Awaiting acknowledgement&amp;quot;, then you should request the Warehouse provider to zero receive the PO; the PO will then be available in the Manage purchase order exception screen. From the manage purchase order exceptions screen, click on [[File:20200609 Close PO.png|70px]] and select a reason for cancelling the PO.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:20200609 Cancelation reason.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Creating Clone Purchase Orders&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some clients are configured to allow a purchase order to be cloned.  This can be used when a vendor has over-delivered on a given purchase order - a copy of the original PO can be created to allow for the excess stock to be receipt confirmed (note that SkyLog does not support over-receiving a purchase order).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a PO is cloned, the clone-PO (also known as a covert order) is not shared with the vendor, the vendor will not be notified when it is created - thus there should be no chance that the vendor will fulfill the new, spin-off, purchase order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Notes&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* This feature is only applicable to some customers, if you are unsure if your airline is configured with this functionality enabled or not, please contact the support team.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* A purchase order can only be cloned &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;i&amp;gt;ONCE&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; - thus if there has been an over-delivery against a particular order, there is ONE opportunity to capture details of the excess stock that was delivered agaisnt it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a limited time window in which an over-received purchase order can be cloned.  It is assumed that if a vendor has over delivered against an order, this will come to light quickly - e.g. the supplier was supposed to deliver 100 boxes of product but upon counting the stock, they've actually delivered 105 boxes and the vendor  has invoiced for 105 boxes accordingly.  The planning team have six weeks in which to clone the original (over-received) order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is only possible to clone a purchase that has been concluded with stock receipt - thus if a purchase is in status: &amp;quot;Partially Received&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Supplier Fully Committed&amp;quot; it will not be eligible for cloning.  Thus only purchase orders in status: Fully Received can be cloned &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;(note: need to check if its possible to clone a PO in status: &amp;quot;Partially Received, Closed&amp;quot;.)&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To clone an over-received puchase order, find the order and then click on the Edit icon.  A dialog box will be presented and if the order is eligible for cloning yuou will see a button to do so, please see below as an illustration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CreateClonePurchaseOrder.png|500px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_PlannedIndex&amp;diff=2722</id>
		<title>Substitution PlannedIndex</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_PlannedIndex&amp;diff=2722"/>
		<updated>2021-09-20T15:15:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;To view, create and take action upon planned substitutions, go to the Reference Data main menu, on it you will see a sub-menu option for Substitutions and within that sub-menu, you will see the option for Planned Substitutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on your access rights, you may see planned substitutions for just one or many airlines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Creating a new Planned Substitution''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new planned substitution by clicking on the + (add) button on the toolbar above the data grid.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again, depending on your access rights, you may be prompted to choose an airline; if you only have access rights for a single airline then you will not be prompted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to choose a product that will be substituted, you will need to click on the &amp;quot;Select Stock Item&amp;quot; button, a dialog will be presented to you - you can apply filters to find the item that is to be substituted/replaced (note: this may be a generic product).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, you will be prompted to specify a Substitution Method, the options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Percentage Split&lt;br /&gt;
* Day Of Week Split&lt;br /&gt;
* Date Range Split&lt;br /&gt;
* Market Split&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Percentage Split ===&lt;br /&gt;
So for example, you have a generic material, GENRED01 which is detailed in the bill of materials (BOM) loading instructions and the reality is that flights will be loaded with one of 5x different red wine products, RW0037, RW0044, RW0052, RW0067 and RW0071; there will be an equal split across the five wine products, thus you could setup the planned substitution with 5x lines, one line for each of the real wines that will be loaded.  As the split is equal, each line would have a loading of 20%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:''' &lt;br /&gt;
* If you attempt to activate the substitution and the sum of your split percentages does not add up to 100%, you will be informed by the portal and you will be unable to activate the substitution.  So, for example, if there were 3x products rather than 5x and it needs to be an even split, you would need to have 2x lines at 33.3% and one at 33.4%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can only specify one decimal place for a percentage split; thus 33.3 is OK whilst 33.33333 would be rounded and stored as 33.3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Day Of Week Split ===&lt;br /&gt;
So again, as an example, you have a generic material, GENRED01 which is detailed in the bill of materials (BOM) loading instructions but you want your forecast to show replace that generic material with a real product and you want to show that if the flight takes off on:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a Monday or a Saturday, then the flight will be loaded with item: RW0037.&lt;br /&gt;
* a Tuesday, then the flight will be loaded with item: RW0044&lt;br /&gt;
* a Wednesday, then the flight will be loaded with item: RW0067&lt;br /&gt;
* a Thursday, then the flight will be loaded with item: RW0071&lt;br /&gt;
* and if the flight departs on a Fridat or a Sunday, it will be item: RW0052 that's loaded&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Date Range Split ===&lt;br /&gt;
So, again, as an example, suppose we have a generic material, GENRED01 which is detailed in the bill of materials (BOM) loading instructions but during the month of September, flights will be loaded with item RW0037, during the month of October, flights will be loaded with RW0071 and during the month of November, RW0052 will be loaded.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTE:''' Dates should butt-up against one another and should not overlap.  So in the example given, the first date range would for the initial date range would be 01-SEPT-20xx until the the 30-SEP-20xx where the generic product would be substituted for item: RW0037, whilst for the 2nd period where the generic material is replaced with item RW0071, the date range would be defined as starting on the 1-OCT-20xx and valid until the 31-OCT-20xx.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maket Split ===&lt;br /&gt;
So, again, as an example, suppose we have a generic material, GENRED01 which is detailed in the bill of materials (BOM) loading instructions and you have multiple different markets defined, lets say the Markets setup are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Domestic (and lets suppose the airline is based in the USA)&lt;br /&gt;
* NAM-to-SAM (North America to South America)&lt;br /&gt;
* SAM-to-NAM (South America to North America)&lt;br /&gt;
* NAM-to-EUR(North America to Europe)&lt;br /&gt;
* EUR-to-NAM (Europe to North America)&lt;br /&gt;
* NAM-to-ME(North America to Middle East)&lt;br /&gt;
* ME-to-NAM (Middle East to North America)&lt;br /&gt;
* NAM-to-ASIA(North America to Asia)&lt;br /&gt;
* ME-to-ASIA (Asia to North America)&lt;br /&gt;
* NAM-to-AFRICA(North America to Africa)&lt;br /&gt;
* AFRICA-to-ASIA (Africa to North America)&lt;br /&gt;
* NAM-to-OCEANIA(North America to Austria, NZ &amp;amp; Pacific Islands - Fiji, Samoa etc)&lt;br /&gt;
* OCEANIA-to-ASIA (Austria, NZ &amp;amp; Pacific Islands - Fiji, Samoa etcto North America)&lt;br /&gt;
* Other&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could setup a split so that if loading was for a flight that had been matched to to the Domestic Market, 100% of the Generic Product would be replaced with item: RW0037.  If however, the loading was for a flight which had been matched to the NAM-to-SAM maket, you could have a 4x way equal split across replacement items: RW0044, RW0052, RW0067 and RW0071.  If the loading was for a flight matched to the NAM-to-ASIA market though, the split could be defined three ways with 60% replaced with RW0067, 30% with RW0052 and 10% with RW0071.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''NOTES:'''  &lt;br /&gt;
* This method relies upon the airline being set up with multiple markets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you attempt to activate the substitution and the sum of your split percentages does not add up to 100%, you will be informed by the portal and you will be unable to activate the substitution.  So, for example, if the substituion is to split the substitution across three different markets, you would need to have 2x lines at 33.3% and one at 33.4%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* As above, you can only specify one decimal place for each split; thus 33.3 is OK whilst 33.33333 would be rounded and stored as 33.3&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General Notes ===&lt;br /&gt;
* It is not possible to use a combination of splits, thus you can have a Day of Week split that is valid between Date-X and Date-Y.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* There is no approval process for planned substitutions, once activated, the substitution will take IMMEDIATE effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is not possible to specify a planned substitution for a specific station nor warehouse, the substitution will apply across all stations and all warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Planned substitutions have no bearing (impact) on the requsitioning (DRP) process; planned substitutions only affect forecasting results (NWA); NWA data is used/referenced by both MRP and automatically-generated requisitions though.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Planned substitutions only have an impact if the airline is configured with provision loadings that are matched to flights when a new forecast (NWA) is triggered, this criteria is not met not all airlines though.  If NWA is managed by uploading NWA instructions via the portal, then setting up planned substitutions will not have any impact; to be clear - any planned substitutions that are defined will be redundant and will not be used when new NWA instructions are specified.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If a planned substitution is no longer relevant, it can be deleted.  Alternatively, if its merely that the percentage figures need to be adjusted/revised, such updates can be done via the portal.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is not possible to change the split-type once a planned substitution has been created, if the wrong split-type was specified, the substitution will need to be removed and re-created.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_PlannedIndex&amp;diff=2721</id>
		<title>Substitution PlannedIndex</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Substitution_PlannedIndex&amp;diff=2721"/>
		<updated>2021-09-20T13:00:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: Created page with &amp;quot;To view, create and take action upon planned substitutions, go to the Reference Data main menu, on it you will see a sub-menu option for Substitutions and within that sub-menu...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;To view, create and take action upon planned substitutions, go to the Reference Data main menu, on it you will see a sub-menu option for Substitutions and within that sub-menu, you will see the option for Planned Substitutions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on your access rights, you may see planned substitutions for just one or many airlines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Creating a new Planned Substitution''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new planned substitution by clicking on the + (add) button on the toolbar above the data grid.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Again, depending on your access rights, you may be prompted to choose an airline; if you only have access rights for a single airline then you will not be prompted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will then be prompted to choose a product that will be substituted, you will need to click on the &amp;quot;Select Stock Item&amp;quot; button, a dialog will be presented to you - you can apply filters to find the item that is to be substituted/replaced (note: this may be a generic product).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, you will be prompted to specify a Substitution Method, the options are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Percentage Split&lt;br /&gt;
* Day Of Week Split&lt;br /&gt;
* Date Range Split&lt;br /&gt;
* Market Split&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Percentage Split ===&lt;br /&gt;
So for example, you have a generic material, GENRED01 which is detailed in the bill of materials (BOM) loading instructions and the reality is that flights will be loaded with one of 5x different red wine products, RW0037, RW0044, RW0052, RW0067 and RW0071; there will be an equal split across the five wine products, thus you could setup the planned substitution with 5x lines, one line for each of the real wines that will be loaded.  As the split is equal, each line would have a loading of 20%.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NOTES: &lt;br /&gt;
If you attempt to activate the substitution and the sum of your split percentages does not add up to 100%, you will be informed by the portal and you will be unable to activate the substitution.  So, for example, if there were 3x products rather than 5x and it needs to be an even split, you would need to have 2x lines at 33.3% and one at 33.4%&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can only specify one decimal place for a percentage split; thus 33.3 is OK whilst 33.33333 would be rounded and stored as 33.3.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_Approve&amp;diff=2494</id>
		<title>Requisition Approve</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.skylogportal.com/index.php?title=Requisition_Approve&amp;diff=2494"/>
		<updated>2021-08-24T14:56:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Jspicer: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;roles&amp;gt;SLXGLOBALADMIN,SLXLOCALADMIN,AIRLINEANALYTICS,AIRLINEADMIN,SLXOPERATIONAL,AIRLINEADMIN,AIRLINEOPS,AIRLINEMANAG,AIRLINEFIELD&amp;lt;/roles&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Please use our '''[[Tips and Tricks]]''' page for understanding how the SkySuite portal works and how to navigate faster and easier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
__TOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once a station has submitted a Requisition  &lt;br /&gt;
* which they manually created, or &lt;br /&gt;
* which they reviewed after automatic generation&lt;br /&gt;
as the station provisioning manager you will receive an alert message asking you to validate the requistion for approval.‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Requistion Approval pages allow you perform this validation: to check, possibly edit and finally '''approve or reject''' a requisition.‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 If approved, station replenishment orders will be generated for the warehouse/s (Delivery Order) and/or to supplier/s (direct Purchase Order / Call-Off).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Requisitions awaiting Approval&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
use this menu trail to access the list of requisitions to be approved for the stations assigned to you:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Menutrailapprreq.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req2apprview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The list shows not only requistions in status 'awaiting approval'; but all editable requisistions past the review stage before their completion‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;(for SAP centric clients some requistion data remain editable post approval). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the '''filter and sort options''' to find the Requisition you need to approve.‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;You can use the drop down ([[file:Dropdown2.png]]) to quickly check the stock items in the Requisition. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To '''edit''' the requistion detail and eventually proceed with requistion approval/rejection, click the pencil icon [[file:20200527 Edit.png]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1&amp;gt;Validation of a Requisition for Approval&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within the Requisition you will see ''non-editable'' '''header information''':‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
requisiton number (unique ID), origin (how the requistion was created), weights/volumes (for 'approved' it updates automatically) and station comments.‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;The 'requested date' and 'preferred transport mode' can or need ''to be edited''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req2apprheader.png|1000px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''Required Date''' - The date the order needs to arrive at the station&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''Preferred Transport Mode''' - Depending on 'station item' config there may be &amp;gt;1 MOT, SkyLog changes the mode automatically based on the 'required date'&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 * '''Comment''' - you can add on to the station comment&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''Client Order Note''' - optional field for client referencing or other comments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the '''detail section''' the order line items are list (this guide explains requisitions with status 'awaiting approval', the columns shown on the grid vary for manual Requisitions and for SAP-centric accounts):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req2apprdetail.png|1500px|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This sample screen is for an &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;automatic&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; generated requisition for a &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;non-SAP centric&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; account:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''item code, description &amp;amp; stock unit''' - core stock item data (click on the item code hyperlink to see the stock item summary)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''quantity suggested''' - the quantity required to meet demand and secure sufficient coverage into the next replenishment cycle; this is calculated by automatic requisitions only&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      use the drop down ([[file:Dropdown2.png]]) on the left from the item code to see how this quantity is calculated&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 * '''quantity requested''' - the quantity the station places the order for&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
 * '''quantity approved''' - the quantity that you approve to process the order&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''direct delivery''' - station item setting for how to replenish. 'no' =&amp;gt; supply from warehouse (holding xy free stock); 'yes' =&amp;gt; place purchase order with supplier&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''Preferred Transport Mode''' - MOT for the line item (depending on the 'required date' the line item must arrive at the station to avoid stock-out, may differ from header date)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''ship days''' - the duration assigned to the respective mode of transport (MOT), this is set in the station defaults for the corresponding station item&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''quantity in transit''' - any shipments for the line item destined to the station (click on the number hyperlink to see transit shipment details)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''Preferred Transport Mode''' - MOT for the order line item (can be different than in header)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''Source override''' - option to change the default setting for the source warehouse (applicable only where multiple warehouses can supply the station item)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''Comment''' - observations made by the system (can be overwritten by station and station provisioning manager)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''item required date''' -the date the order line must arrive at the station to prevent falling below safety stock level; calculated by automatic requisitions only&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;NOTE:&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;  If the requisition was created automatically, if you expand a row on the requisition, you will see a section titled: &amp;quot;Explain Forecast&amp;quot; - in that section, you will see a label &amp;quot;Expected Date of Delivery After This One (End of Forecast Period)&amp;quot;.  A date may or may not be presented against it; if no date is displayed, you may see &amp;quot;Unknown&amp;quot; - this means that SkyLog has been unable to accurately determine a value (date) due to the configuration of the station par level; SkyLog cannot accurately determine a future expected delivery date if &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;&amp;quot;How is the item to be Requisitioned&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; is set to either &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Manual&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt; or &amp;lt;i&amp;gt;Event&amp;lt;/i&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other grid columns are shown for requisitions generated &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;manually&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; and for &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;SAP centric&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; accounts (see example under next chapter 'loading groups'):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''item code, description &amp;amp; stock unit''' - core stock item data (click on the item code hyperlink to see the stock item summary)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
      use the drop down ([[file:Dropdown2.png]]) on the left to access additional line information (stock out date &amp;amp; quantity, ship days, order line weight/volume)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
 * '''last counted inventory''' - the quantity the station reported with their last stock report&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''target float level''' - the quantity the station is expected to have in their production area (SAP centric accouts only)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''target backup level''' - the quantity the station is expected to have in their warehouse (SAP centric accouts only)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''target float and backup level''' - the total quantity the station is expected to have (SAP centric accouts only)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''net consumption forecast till next delivery''' - the expected demand to cover by the present requisition (taken from external item demand forecast)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 * '''average consumption''' - the expected demand to cover by the present requisition (calculated by historical demand)&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Typically you will compare 'quantities requested' with 'quantities suggested' and where these differ, investigate further (station comment? stock availability? use of container capacity?).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Any negative quantity values indicate excess-inventory that needs to be returned from the station, however, this scenario can be prevented in the [[Station_Index#Stations_creation|'''Station settings''']]. ('default negative to zero').&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Before approving an item line in column, check for eventual outstanding orders in the backorder logs.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;If needed, items can be added manually to the requisition. However, for substitutions the process is automatic, provided that  the required settings have been captured. Refer to [[Substitution_UnplannedIndex#Requisitions|'''impact of Substitions in Requisitions.''']]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; As opposed to the process when dealing with queries at approval of inventory counts, here there are '''no query loops'''. Eventually you will need to '''approve or reject''' the entire requisition.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt; For the validation process use the command buttons:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:90%&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|- &lt;br /&gt;
! Button&lt;br /&gt;
! Function&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:countpendingapprovalbuttonsback.png|30px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Back -&amp;gt; leave the page without storing your work (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval') &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:countpendingapprovalbuttonssafencontinue.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Save your updates made to the page and continue working on the page (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval') &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:countpendingapprovalbuttonssafenexit.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Save your updates made to the page and leave the page to continue later (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval') &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:Req2apprsetall.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Set all 'quantities approved' equal to 'quantities requested', mind this will only update the amout of lines on display =&amp;gt; get all items on the page to set all quantities for the entire order (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval')  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:Req2apprclearall.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Set all 'quantities approved' to 0, please mind this will only update the amout of lines on display =&amp;gt; get all items on the page to clear all quantities approved for the entire order (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval') &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:Req2appshowdiff.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Filter the order lines to show only line items where 'quantity reqeusted' differs from 'quantity suggested' (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval')&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:Req2appsetallReqDte.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Copy header 'required date' to all order line items (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval') &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:Req2appsetallMOT.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Copy header 'transport mode' to all order line items (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval') &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:Req2appREJECT.png|50px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Irreversably Reject the requisition (-&amp;gt; status will change to 'rejected')   &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:Req2appAPPROVE.png|60px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Irreversably Approve the requisition (-&amp;gt; status will change to 'complete'; for SAP-centric accounts status for change to 'awaiting schedule')  &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:Req2apprPICK.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|capture pick instructions for the Delivery Order posting destined to the source warehouse (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval')&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
![[file:Req2apprLG.png|80px]]&lt;br /&gt;
|Loading Groups function, see next chapter (-&amp;gt; status remains 'awaiting approval')     &lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 When an approval contains an item where the 'quantity approved' is &amp;gt; 'quantity suggested', a '''final warning''' is displayed for you to acknowledge this decsion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;Loading Groups&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Depending on [[Airline_Index#How_to_create_.2F_update_the_Attributes_for_an_Airline|'''the Airline configuration''']] you can optionally create/add/edit '''loading groups''', with this function you assign the order line items to specific transportation units (Pallets, Containers).&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;Note the different grid columns for SAP entric accounts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Req2apprdetailSAP.png|1500px|]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Jspicer</name></author>
		
	</entry>
</feed>